Add support for the WebAssembly file format and the wasm32 ELF conversion to gas...
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
239 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
240 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249 @c
250 @c man end
251 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
252 @c Add an empty line for separation.
253 @c man begin TARGET
254 @ifset AARCH64
255
256 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
257 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
258 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
259 @end ifset
260 @ifset ALPHA
261
262 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
263 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
264 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
265 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
266 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
267 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
268 @end ifset
269 @ifset ARC
270
271 @emph{Target ARC options:}
272 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
273 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
274 [@b{-mcode-density}]
275 [@b{-mrelax}]
276 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
277 @end ifset
278 @ifset ARM
279
280 @emph{Target ARM options:}
281 @c Don't document the deprecated options
282 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
283 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
284 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
285 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
286 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
287 [@b{-mthumb}]
288 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
289 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
290 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
291 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
292 @end ifset
293 @ifset Blackfin
294
295 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
296 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
297 [@b{-mfdpic}]
298 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
299 [@b{-mnopic}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset CRIS
302
303 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
304 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
305 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
306 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
307 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
308 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
309 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset D10V
312
313 @emph{Target D10V options:}
314 [@b{-O}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset D30V
317
318 @emph{Target D30V options:}
319 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset EPIPHANY
322
323 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
324 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
325 @end ifset
326 @ifset H8
327
328 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
329 [-h-tick-hex]
330 @end ifset
331 @ifset HPPA
332 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
333 @end ifset
334 @ifset I80386
335
336 @emph{Target i386 options:}
337 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
338 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
339 @end ifset
340 @ifset I960
341
342 @emph{Target i960 options:}
343 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
344 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
345 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
346 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
347 @end ifset
348 @ifset IA64
349
350 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
351 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
352 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
353 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
354 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
355 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
356 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
357 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset IP2K
360
361 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
362 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M32C
365
366 @emph{Target M32C options:}
367 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M32R
370
371 @emph{Target M32R options:}
372 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
373 @b{--W[n]p}]
374 @end ifset
375 @ifset M680X0
376
377 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
378 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset M68HC11
381
382 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
383 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
384 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
385 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
386 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
387 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
388 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
389 @end ifset
390 @ifset MCORE
391
392 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
393 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
394 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
395 @end ifset
396 @ifset METAG
397
398 @emph{Target Meta options:}
399 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
400 @end ifset
401 @ifset MICROBLAZE
402 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
403 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
404 @end ifset
405 @ifset MIPS
406
407 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
408 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
409 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
410 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
411 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
412 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
413 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
414 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
415 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
416 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
417 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
418 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
419 [@b{-mignore-branch-isa}] [@b{-mno-ignore-branch-isa}]
420 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
421 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
422 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
423 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
424 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
425 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
426 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
427 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
428 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
429 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
430 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
431 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
432 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
433 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
434 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
435 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
436 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
437 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
438 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
439 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
440 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
441 @end ifset
442 @ifset MMIX
443
444 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
445 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
446 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
447 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
448 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
449 @end ifset
450 @ifset NIOSII
451
452 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
453 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
454 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
455 @end ifset
456 @ifset NDS32
457
458 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
459 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
460 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
461 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
462 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
463 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
464 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
465 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
466 [@b{-mb2bb}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset PDP11
469
470 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
471 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
472 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
473 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
474 @end ifset
475 @ifset PJ
476
477 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
478 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
479 @end ifset
480 @ifset PPC
481
482 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
483 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
484 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
485 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
486 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
487 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
488 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
489 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
490 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
491 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
492 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
493 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
494 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
495 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
496 @end ifset
497 @ifset PRU
498
499 @emph{Target PRU options:}
500 [@b{-link-relax}]
501 [@b{-mnolink-relax}]
502 [@b{-mno-warn-regname-label}]
503 @end ifset
504 @ifset RL78
505
506 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
507 [@b{-mg10}]
508 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
509 @end ifset
510 @ifset RX
511
512 @emph{Target RX options:}
513 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
514 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
515 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
516 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
517 [@b{-mpid}]
518 [@b{-mrelax}]
519 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
520 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
521 @end ifset
522 @ifset RISCV
523
524 @emph{Target RISC-V options:}
525 [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
526 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
527 @end ifset
528 @ifset S390
529
530 @emph{Target s390 options:}
531 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
532 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
533 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
534 @end ifset
535 @ifset SCORE
536
537 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
538 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
539 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
540 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
541 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
542 @end ifset
543 @ifset SPARC
544
545 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
546 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
547 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
548 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
549 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
550 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
551 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
552 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
553 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
554 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
555 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
556 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
557 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
558 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
559 @b{-bump}]
560 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
561 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
562 @end ifset
563 @ifset TIC54X
564
565 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
566 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
567 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
568 @end ifset
569 @ifset TIC6X
570
571 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
572 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
573 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
574 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
575 @end ifset
576 @ifset TILEGX
577
578 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
579 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
580 @end ifset
581 @ifset TILEPRO
582 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
583 @end ifset
584 @ifset VISIUM
585
586 @emph{Target Visium options:}
587 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
588 @end ifset
589 @ifset XTENSA
590
591 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
592 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
593 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
594 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
595 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
596 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
597 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
598 @end ifset
599 @ifset Z80
600
601 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
602 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
603 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
604 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
605 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
606 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
607 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
608 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
609 @end ifset
610 @ifset Z8000
611
612 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
613 @end ifset
614
615 @c man end
616 @end smallexample
617
618 @c man begin OPTIONS
619
620 @table @gcctabopt
621 @include at-file.texi
622
623 @item -a[cdghlmns]
624 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
625
626 @table @gcctabopt
627 @item -ac
628 omit false conditionals
629
630 @item -ad
631 omit debugging directives
632
633 @item -ag
634 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
635
636 @item -ah
637 include high-level source
638
639 @item -al
640 include assembly
641
642 @item -am
643 include macro expansions
644
645 @item -an
646 omit forms processing
647
648 @item -as
649 include symbols
650
651 @item =file
652 set the name of the listing file
653 @end table
654
655 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
656 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
657 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
658
659 @item --alternate
660 Begin in alternate macro mode.
661 @ifclear man
662 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
663 @end ifclear
664
665 @item --compress-debug-sections
666 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
667 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
668 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
669 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
670
671 @ifset ELF
672 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
673 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
674 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
675 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
676 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
677 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
678 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
679 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
680 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
681 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
682 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
683 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
684 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
685 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
686 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
687
688 @end ifset
689
690 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
691 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
692 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
693 override this.
694
695 @item -D
696 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
697 other assemblers.
698
699 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
700 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
701 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
702
703 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
704 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
705 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
706 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
707 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
708 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
709
710 @item -f
711 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
712 compiler output).
713
714 @item -g
715 @itemx --gen-debug
716 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
717 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
718 ECOFF or DWARF2.
719
720 @item --gstabs
721 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
722 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
723
724 @item --gstabs+
725 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
726 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
727 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
728 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
729 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
730
731 @item --gdwarf-2
732 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
733 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
734 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
735
736 @item --gdwarf-sections
737 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
738 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
739 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
740 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
741 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
742 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
743 suffix.
744
745 @ifset ELF
746 @item --size-check=error
747 @itemx --size-check=warning
748 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
749
750 @item --elf-stt-common=no
751 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
752 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
753 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
754 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
755 @end ifset
756
757 @item --help
758 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
759
760 @item --target-help
761 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
762
763 @item -I @var{dir}
764 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
765
766 @item -J
767 Don't warn about signed overflow.
768
769 @item -K
770 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
771 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
772 @end ifclear
773 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
774 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
775 @end ifset
776
777 @item -L
778 @itemx --keep-locals
779 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
780 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
781 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
782 @ifclear man
783 @xref{Symbol Names}.
784 @end ifclear
785
786 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
787 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
788 listing to @var{number}.
789
790 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
791 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
792 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
793
794 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
795 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
796 @var{number} bytes.
797
798 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
799 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
800 to @var{number} + 1.
801
802 @item --no-pad-sections
803 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
804 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
805 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
806
807 @item -o @var{objfile}
808 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
809
810 @item -R
811 Fold the data section into the text section.
812
813 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
814 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
815 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
816 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
817 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
818 requirements at the expense of speed.
819
820 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
821 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
822 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
823 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
824
825 @ifset ELF
826 @item --sectname-subst
827 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
828 @ifclear man
829 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
830 @end ifclear
831 @end ifset
832
833 @item --statistics
834 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
835 assembly.
836
837 @item --strip-local-absolute
838 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
839
840 @item -v
841 @itemx -version
842 Print the @command{as} version.
843
844 @item --version
845 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
846
847 @item -W
848 @itemx --no-warn
849 Suppress warning messages.
850
851 @item --fatal-warnings
852 Treat warnings as errors.
853
854 @item --warn
855 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
856
857 @item -w
858 Ignored.
859
860 @item -x
861 Ignored.
862
863 @item -Z
864 Generate an object file even after errors.
865
866 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
867 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
868
869 @end table
870 @c man end
871
872 @ifset AARCH64
873
874 @ifclear man
875 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
876 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
877 @end ifclear
878
879 @ifset man
880 @c man begin OPTIONS
881 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
882 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
883 @c man end
884 @c man begin INCLUDE
885 @include c-aarch64.texi
886 @c ended inside the included file
887 @end ifset
888
889 @end ifset
890
891 @ifset ALPHA
892
893 @ifclear man
894 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
895 for an Alpha processor.
896 @end ifclear
897
898 @ifset man
899 @c man begin OPTIONS
900 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
901 processor.
902 @c man end
903 @c man begin INCLUDE
904 @include c-alpha.texi
905 @c ended inside the included file
906 @end ifset
907
908 @end ifset
909
910 @c man begin OPTIONS
911 @ifset ARC
912 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
913 processor.
914
915 @table @gcctabopt
916 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
917 This option selects the core processor variant.
918 @item -EB | -EL
919 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
920 @item -mcode-density
921 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
922 @end table
923 @end ifset
924
925 @ifset ARM
926 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
927 processor family.
928
929 @table @gcctabopt
930 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
931 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
932 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
933 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
934 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
935 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
936 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
937 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
938 @item -mthumb
939 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
940 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
941 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
942 @item -EB | -EL
943 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
944 @item -mthumb-interwork
945 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
946 ARM code in mind.
947 @item -mccs
948 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
949 @item -k
950 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
951 @end table
952 @end ifset
953 @c man end
954
955 @ifset Blackfin
956
957 @ifclear man
958 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
959 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
960 @end ifclear
961
962 @ifset man
963 @c man begin OPTIONS
964 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
965 the Blackfin processor family.
966 @c man end
967 @c man begin INCLUDE
968 @include c-bfin.texi
969 @c ended inside the included file
970 @end ifset
971
972 @end ifset
973
974 @c man begin OPTIONS
975 @ifset CRIS
976 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
977 @end ifset
978
979 @ifset D10V
980 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
981 a D10V processor.
982 @table @gcctabopt
983 @cindex D10V optimization
984 @cindex optimization, D10V
985 @item -O
986 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
987 @end table
988 @end ifset
989
990 @ifset D30V
991 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
992 processor.
993 @table @gcctabopt
994 @cindex D30V optimization
995 @cindex optimization, D30V
996 @item -O
997 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
998
999 @cindex D30V nops
1000 @item -n
1001 Warn when nops are generated.
1002
1003 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
1004 @item -N
1005 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
1006 @end table
1007 @end ifset
1008 @c man end
1009
1010 @ifset EPIPHANY
1011 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1012 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1013
1014 @ifclear man
1015 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1016 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1017 @end ifclear
1018
1019 @ifset man
1020 @c man begin OPTIONS
1021 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1022 an Epiphany processor.
1023 @c man end
1024 @c man begin INCLUDE
1025 @include c-epiphany.texi
1026 @c ended inside the included file
1027 @end ifset
1028
1029 @end ifset
1030
1031 @ifset H8300
1032
1033 @ifclear man
1034 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1035 for an H8/300 processor.
1036 @end ifclear
1037
1038 @ifset man
1039 @c man begin OPTIONS
1040 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1041 processor.
1042 @c man end
1043 @c man begin INCLUDE
1044 @include c-h8300.texi
1045 @c ended inside the included file
1046 @end ifset
1047
1048 @end ifset
1049
1050 @ifset I80386
1051
1052 @ifclear man
1053 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1054 configured for an i386 processor.
1055 @end ifclear
1056
1057 @ifset man
1058 @c man begin OPTIONS
1059 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1060 an i386 processor.
1061 @c man end
1062 @c man begin INCLUDE
1063 @include c-i386.texi
1064 @c ended inside the included file
1065 @end ifset
1066
1067 @end ifset
1068
1069 @c man begin OPTIONS
1070 @ifset I960
1071 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1072 Intel 80960 processor.
1073
1074 @table @gcctabopt
1075 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1076 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1077
1078 @item -b
1079 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1080
1081 @item -no-relax
1082 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1083 error if necessary.
1084
1085 @end table
1086 @end ifset
1087
1088 @ifset IP2K
1089 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1090 Ubicom IP2K series.
1091
1092 @table @gcctabopt
1093
1094 @item -mip2022ext
1095 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1096
1097 @item -mip2022
1098 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1099 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1100
1101 @end table
1102 @end ifset
1103
1104 @ifset M32C
1105 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1106 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1107
1108 @table @gcctabopt
1109
1110 @item -m32c
1111 Assemble M32C instructions.
1112
1113 @item -m16c
1114 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1115
1116 @item -relax
1117 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1118
1119 @item -h-tick-hex
1120 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1121
1122 @end table
1123 @end ifset
1124
1125 @ifset M32R
1126 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1127 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1128
1129 @table @gcctabopt
1130
1131 @item --m32rx
1132 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1133 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1134
1135 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1136 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1137 encountered.
1138
1139 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1140 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1141 encountered.
1142
1143 @end table
1144 @end ifset
1145
1146 @ifset M680X0
1147 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1148 Motorola 68000 series.
1149
1150 @table @gcctabopt
1151
1152 @item -l
1153 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1154
1155 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1156 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1157 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1158 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1159 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1160
1161 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1162 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1163 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1164 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1165 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1166 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1167
1168 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1169 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1170 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1171
1172 @end table
1173 @end ifset
1174
1175 @ifset NIOSII
1176
1177 @ifclear man
1178 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1179 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1180 @end ifclear
1181
1182 @ifset man
1183 @c man begin OPTIONS
1184 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1185 Altera Nios II processor.
1186 @c man end
1187 @c man begin INCLUDE
1188 @include c-nios2.texi
1189 @c ended inside the included file
1190 @end ifset
1191 @end ifset
1192
1193 @ifset PDP11
1194
1195 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1196 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1197
1198 @table @gcctabopt
1199 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1200 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1201 default is @option{-mpic}.
1202
1203 @item -mall
1204 @itemx -mall-extensions
1205 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1206
1207 @item -mno-extensions
1208 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1209
1210 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1211 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1212
1213 @item -m@var{cpu}
1214 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1215 disable all other extensions.
1216
1217 @item -m@var{machine}
1218 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1219 model, and disable all other extensions.
1220 @end table
1221
1222 @end ifset
1223
1224 @ifset PJ
1225 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1226 a picoJava processor.
1227
1228 @table @gcctabopt
1229
1230 @cindex PJ endianness
1231 @cindex endianness, PJ
1232 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1233 @item -mb
1234 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1235
1236 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1237 @item -ml
1238 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1239
1240 @end table
1241 @end ifset
1242
1243 @ifset PRU
1244
1245 @ifclear man
1246 @xref{PRU Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1247 for a PRU processor.
1248 @end ifclear
1249
1250 @ifset man
1251 @c man begin OPTIONS
1252 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1253 PRU processor.
1254 @c man end
1255 @c man begin INCLUDE
1256 @include c-pru.texi
1257 @c ended inside the included file
1258 @end ifset
1259 @end ifset
1260
1261 @ifset M68HC11
1262 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1263 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1264
1265 @table @gcctabopt
1266
1267 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1268 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1269 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1270
1271 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1272 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1273 XGATE address space.
1274
1275 @item -mshort
1276 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1277
1278 @item -mlong
1279 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1280
1281 @item -mshort-double
1282 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1283
1284 @item -mlong-double
1285 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1286
1287 @item --force-long-branches
1288 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1289 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1290 sub routine.
1291
1292 @item -S | --short-branches
1293 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1294 when the offset is out of range.
1295
1296 @item --strict-direct-mode
1297 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1298 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1299
1300 @item --print-insn-syntax
1301 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1302
1303 @item --print-opcodes
1304 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1305
1306 @item --generate-example
1307 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1308 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1309
1310 @end table
1311 @end ifset
1312
1313 @ifset SPARC
1314 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1315 for the SPARC architecture:
1316
1317 @table @gcctabopt
1318 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1319 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1320 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1321
1322 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1323 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1324
1325 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1326 UltraSPARC extensions.
1327
1328 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1329 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1330 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1331
1332 @item -bump
1333 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1334 @end table
1335 @end ifset
1336
1337 @ifset TIC54X
1338 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1339 architecture.
1340
1341 @table @gcctabopt
1342 @item -mfar-mode
1343 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1344 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1345 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1346 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1347 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1348 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1349 behaviour in the shell.
1350 @end table
1351 @end ifset
1352
1353 @ifset MIPS
1354 @c man begin OPTIONS
1355 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1356 a MIPS processor.
1357
1358 @table @gcctabopt
1359 @item -G @var{num}
1360 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1361 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1362 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1363
1364 @cindex MIPS endianness
1365 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1366 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1367 @item -EB
1368 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1369
1370 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1371 @item -EL
1372 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1373
1374 @cindex MIPS ISA
1375 @item -mips1
1376 @itemx -mips2
1377 @itemx -mips3
1378 @itemx -mips4
1379 @itemx -mips5
1380 @itemx -mips32
1381 @itemx -mips32r2
1382 @itemx -mips32r3
1383 @itemx -mips32r5
1384 @itemx -mips32r6
1385 @itemx -mips64
1386 @itemx -mips64r2
1387 @itemx -mips64r3
1388 @itemx -mips64r5
1389 @itemx -mips64r6
1390 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1391 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1392 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1393 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1394 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1395 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1396 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1397 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1398 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1399 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1400
1401 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1402 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1403
1404 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1405 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1406
1407 @item -mfix7000
1408 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1409 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1410 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1411
1412 @item -mfix-rm7000
1413 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1414 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1415 followed by a load instruction.
1416
1417 @item -mdebug
1418 @itemx -no-mdebug
1419 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1420 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1421
1422 @item -mpdr
1423 @itemx -mno-pdr
1424 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1425
1426 @item -mgp32
1427 @itemx -mfp32
1428 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1429 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1430 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1431 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1432
1433 @item -mgp64
1434 @itemx -mfp64
1435 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1436 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1437 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1438 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1439
1440 @item -mfpxx
1441 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1442 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1443 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1444 32 or 64 bits wide.
1445
1446 @item -modd-spreg
1447 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1448 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1449 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1450 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1451
1452 @item -mips16
1453 @itemx -no-mips16
1454 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1455 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1456 turns off this option.
1457
1458 @item -mmicromips
1459 @itemx -mno-micromips
1460 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1461 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1462 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1463 at the start of the assembly file.
1464
1465 @item -msmartmips
1466 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1467 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1468 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1469 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1470
1471 @item -mips3d
1472 @itemx -no-mips3d
1473 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1474 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1475 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1476
1477 @item -mdmx
1478 @itemx -no-mdmx
1479 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1480 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1481 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1482
1483 @item -mdsp
1484 @itemx -mno-dsp
1485 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1486 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1487 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1488
1489 @item -mdspr2
1490 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1491 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1492 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1493 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1494 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1495
1496 @item -mdspr3
1497 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1498 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1499 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1500 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1501 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1502
1503 @item -mmsa
1504 @itemx -mno-msa
1505 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1506 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1507 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1508
1509 @item -mxpa
1510 @itemx -mno-xpa
1511 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1512 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1513 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1514
1515 @item -mmt
1516 @itemx -mno-mt
1517 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1518 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1519 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1520
1521 @item -mmcu
1522 @itemx -mno-mcu
1523 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1524 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1525 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1526
1527 @item -minsn32
1528 @itemx -mno-insn32
1529 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1530 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1531 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1532 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1533 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1534 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1535 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1536
1537 @item --construct-floats
1538 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1539 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1540 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1541 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1542 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1543 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1544
1545 @item --relax-branch
1546 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1547 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1548 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1549 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1550
1551 @item -mignore-branch-isa
1552 @itemx -mno-ignore-branch-isa
1553 Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes. The
1554 semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in
1555 most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the
1556 same as the ISA mode of the branch's target label. Therefore GAS has
1557 checks implemented that verify in branch assembly that the two ISA
1558 modes match. @samp{-mignore-branch-isa} disables these checks. By
1559 default @samp{-mno-ignore-branch-isa} is selected, causing any invalid
1560 branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
1561
1562 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1563 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1564 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1565
1566 @cindex emulation
1567 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1568 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1569 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1570 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1571 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1572
1573 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1574 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1575 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1576 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1577 preferred options instead.
1578
1579 @item -nocpp
1580 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1581 the native tools.
1582
1583 @item --trap
1584 @itemx --no-trap
1585 @itemx --break
1586 @itemx --no-break
1587 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1588 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1589 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1590 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1591 break exception.
1592
1593 @item -n
1594 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1595 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1596 @end table
1597 @c man end
1598 @end ifset
1599
1600 @ifset MCORE
1601 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1602 an MCore processor.
1603
1604 @table @gcctabopt
1605 @item -jsri2bsr
1606 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1607 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1608 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1609
1610 @item -sifilter
1611 @itemx -nosifilter
1612 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1613 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1614
1615 @item -relax
1616 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1617
1618 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1619 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1620 can be assembled.
1621
1622 @item -EB
1623 Assemble for a big endian target.
1624
1625 @item -EL
1626 Assemble for a little endian target.
1627
1628 @end table
1629 @end ifset
1630 @c man end
1631
1632 @ifset METAG
1633
1634 @ifclear man
1635 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1636 for a Meta processor.
1637 @end ifclear
1638
1639 @ifset man
1640 @c man begin OPTIONS
1641 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1642 Meta processor.
1643 @c man end
1644 @c man begin INCLUDE
1645 @include c-metag.texi
1646 @c ended inside the included file
1647 @end ifset
1648
1649 @end ifset
1650
1651 @c man begin OPTIONS
1652 @ifset MMIX
1653 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1654 @end ifset
1655
1656 @ifset NDS32
1657
1658 @ifclear man
1659 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1660 for a NDS32 processor.
1661 @end ifclear
1662 @c ended inside the included file
1663 @end ifset
1664
1665 @ifset man
1666 @c man begin OPTIONS
1667 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1668 NDS32 processor.
1669 @c man end
1670 @c man begin INCLUDE
1671 @include c-nds32.texi
1672 @c ended inside the included file
1673 @end ifset
1674
1675 @c man end
1676 @ifset PPC
1677
1678 @ifclear man
1679 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1680 for a PowerPC processor.
1681 @end ifclear
1682
1683 @ifset man
1684 @c man begin OPTIONS
1685 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1686 PowerPC processor.
1687 @c man end
1688 @c man begin INCLUDE
1689 @include c-ppc.texi
1690 @c ended inside the included file
1691 @end ifset
1692
1693 @end ifset
1694
1695 @ifset RISCV
1696
1697 @ifclear man
1698 @xref{RISC-V-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1699 for a RISC-V processor.
1700 @end ifclear
1701
1702 @ifset man
1703 @c man begin OPTIONS
1704 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1705 RISC-V processor.
1706 @c man end
1707 @c man begin INCLUDE
1708 @include c-riscv.texi
1709 @c ended inside the included file
1710 @end ifset
1711
1712 @end ifset
1713
1714 @c man begin OPTIONS
1715 @ifset RX
1716 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1717 @end ifset
1718
1719 @ifset S390
1720 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1721 processor family.
1722
1723 @table @gcctabopt
1724 @item -m31
1725 @itemx -m64
1726 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1727 @item -mesa
1728 @item -mzarch
1729 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1730 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1731 @item -march=@var{processor}
1732 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1733 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1734 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1735 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1736 @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}), or @samp{arch12}.
1737 @item -mregnames
1738 @itemx -mno-regnames
1739 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1740 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1741 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1742 but evaluates to zero.
1743 @end table
1744 @end ifset
1745 @c man end
1746
1747 @ifset TIC6X
1748
1749 @ifclear man
1750 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1751 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1752 @end ifclear
1753
1754 @ifset man
1755 @c man begin OPTIONS
1756 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1757 TMS320C6000 processor.
1758 @c man end
1759 @c man begin INCLUDE
1760 @include c-tic6x.texi
1761 @c ended inside the included file
1762 @end ifset
1763
1764 @end ifset
1765
1766 @ifset TILEGX
1767
1768 @ifclear man
1769 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1770 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1771 @end ifclear
1772
1773 @ifset man
1774 @c man begin OPTIONS
1775 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1776 processor.
1777 @c man end
1778 @c man begin INCLUDE
1779 @include c-tilegx.texi
1780 @c ended inside the included file
1781 @end ifset
1782
1783 @end ifset
1784
1785 @ifset VISIUM
1786
1787 @ifclear man
1788 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1789 for a Visium processor.
1790 @end ifclear
1791
1792 @ifset man
1793 @c man begin OPTIONS
1794 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1795 processor.
1796 @c man end
1797 @c man begin INCLUDE
1798 @include c-visium.texi
1799 @c ended inside the included file
1800 @end ifset
1801
1802 @end ifset
1803
1804 @ifset XTENSA
1805
1806 @ifclear man
1807 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1808 for an Xtensa processor.
1809 @end ifclear
1810
1811 @ifset man
1812 @c man begin OPTIONS
1813 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1814 Xtensa processor.
1815 @c man end
1816 @c man begin INCLUDE
1817 @include c-xtensa.texi
1818 @c ended inside the included file
1819 @end ifset
1820
1821 @end ifset
1822
1823 @c man begin OPTIONS
1824
1825 @ifset Z80
1826 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1827 a Z80 family processor.
1828 @table @gcctabopt
1829 @item -z80
1830 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1831 @item -r800
1832 Assemble for R800 processor.
1833 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1834 @itemx -Wnud
1835 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1836 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1837 @itemx -Wnup
1838 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1839 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1840 @itemx -Wud
1841 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1842 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1843 @itemx -Wup
1844 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1845 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1846 @itemx -Fud
1847 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1848 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1849 @itemx -Fup
1850 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1851 @end table
1852 @end ifset
1853
1854 @c man end
1855
1856 @menu
1857 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1858 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1859 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1860 * Command Line:: Command Line
1861 * Input Files:: Input Files
1862 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1863 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1864 @end menu
1865
1866 @node Manual
1867 @section Structure of this Manual
1868
1869 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1870 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1871 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1872 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1873 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1874
1875 @ifclear GENERIC
1876 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1877 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1878 @end ifclear
1879 @ifset GENERIC
1880 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1881 various flavors of the assembler.
1882 @end ifset
1883
1884 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1885 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1886 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1887 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1888 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1889 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1890 particular architecture.
1891 @ifset GENERIC
1892 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1893 machine architecture manual for this information.
1894 @end ifset
1895 @ifclear GENERIC
1896 @ifset H8/300
1897 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1898 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1899 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1900 @end ifset
1901 @ifset SH
1902 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1903 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1904 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1905 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1906 @end ifset
1907 @ifset Z8000
1908 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1909 @end ifset
1910 @end ifclear
1911
1912 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1913 @ignore
1914 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1915 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1916 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1917 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1918 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1919 qualification.
1920
1921 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1922 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1923 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1924 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1925 @end ignore
1926
1927 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1928 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1929 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1930 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1931 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1932 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1933 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1934 @c directives).
1935
1936 @node GNU Assembler
1937 @section The GNU Assembler
1938
1939 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1940
1941 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1942 @ifclear GENERIC
1943 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1944 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1945 @end ifclear
1946 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1947 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1948 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1949 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1950 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1951
1952 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1953 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1954 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1955 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1956 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1957 machine would assemble.
1958 @ifset VAX
1959 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1960 @end ifset
1961 @ifset M680X0
1962 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1963 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1964 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1965 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1966 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1967 @end ifset
1968
1969 @c man end
1970
1971 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1972 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1973 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1974
1975 @node Object Formats
1976 @section Object File Formats
1977
1978 @cindex object file format
1979 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1980 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1981 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1982 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1983 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1984 @ifclear GENERIC
1985 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1986 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1987 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1988 @end ifclear
1989 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1990 @ifset I960
1991 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1992 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1993 @end ifset
1994 @ifset HPPA
1995 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1996 SOM or ELF format object files.
1997 @end ifset
1998 @end ifclear
1999
2000 @node Command Line
2001 @section Command Line
2002
2003 @cindex command line conventions
2004
2005 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
2006 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
2007 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
2008 significant.
2009
2010 @cindex standard input, as input file
2011 @kindex --
2012 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
2013 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
2014
2015 @cindex options, command line
2016 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
2017 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
2018 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
2019 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
2020 the letter is important. All options are optional.
2021
2022 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
2023 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
2024 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
2025 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
2026
2027 @smallexample
2028 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
2029 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
2030 @end smallexample
2031
2032 @node Input Files
2033 @section Input Files
2034
2035 @cindex input
2036 @cindex source program
2037 @cindex files, input
2038 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2039 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
2040 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2041 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2042
2043 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2044 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
2045 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2046 order specified.
2047
2048 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2049 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2050 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
2051 (The standard input is also a file.)
2052
2053 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2054 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
2055 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2056 is taken to be an input file name.
2057
2058 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2059 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
2060 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2061 to assemble.
2062
2063 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2064 in your command line.
2065
2066 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2067 file.
2068
2069 @c man end
2070
2071 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2072
2073 @cindex input file linenumbers
2074 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2075 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2076 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2077 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2078 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2079
2080 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2081 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2082
2083 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2084 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2085 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2086 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2087 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2088 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2089
2090 @node Object
2091 @section Output (Object) File
2092
2093 @cindex object file
2094 @cindex output file
2095 @kindex a.out
2096 @kindex .o
2097 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2098 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2099 is the object file. Its default name is
2100 @ifclear BOUT
2101 @code{a.out}.
2102 @end ifclear
2103 @ifset BOUT
2104 @ifset GENERIC
2105 @code{a.out}, or
2106 @end ifset
2107 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2108 @end ifset
2109 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2110 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2111 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2112 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2113 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2114
2115 @cindex linker
2116 @kindex ld
2117 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2118 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2119 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2120 information for the debugger.
2121
2122 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2123 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2124
2125 @node Errors
2126 @section Error and Warning Messages
2127
2128 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2129
2130 @cindex error messages
2131 @cindex warning messages
2132 @cindex messages from assembler
2133 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2134 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2135 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2136 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2137 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2138
2139 @c man end
2140
2141 @cindex format of warning messages
2142 Warning messages have the format
2143
2144 @smallexample
2145 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2146 @end smallexample
2147
2148 @noindent
2149 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2150 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2151 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2152 @ifset GENERIC
2153 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2154 @end ifset
2155 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2156 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2157 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2158
2159 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2160 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2161
2162 @smallexample
2163 .file 2 "bar.c"
2164 error_assembler_source
2165 .file "foo.c"
2166 .line 30
2167 error_c_source
2168 @end smallexample
2169
2170 produces this output:
2171
2172 @smallexample
2173 Assembler messages:
2174 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2175 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2176 @end smallexample
2177
2178 @cindex format of error messages
2179 Error messages have the format
2180
2181 @smallexample
2182 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2183 @end smallexample
2184
2185 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2186 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2187 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2188
2189 @node Invoking
2190 @chapter Command-Line Options
2191
2192 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2193 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2194 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2195 for options specific
2196 @ifclear GENERIC
2197 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2198 @end ifclear
2199 @ifset GENERIC
2200 to particular machine architectures.
2201 @end ifset
2202
2203 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2204
2205 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2206 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2207 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2208 by commas. For example:
2209
2210 @smallexample
2211 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2212 @end smallexample
2213
2214 @noindent
2215 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2216 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2217 local symbols in the symbol table).
2218
2219 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2220 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2221 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2222 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2223 assembler.)
2224
2225 @c man end
2226
2227 @menu
2228 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2229 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2230 * D:: -D for compatibility
2231 * f:: -f to work faster
2232 * I:: -I for .include search path
2233 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2234 * K:: -K for compatibility
2235 @end ifclear
2236 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2237 * K:: -K for difference tables
2238 @end ifset
2239
2240 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2241 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2242 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2243 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2244 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2245 * o:: -o to name the object file
2246 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2247 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2248 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2249 * v:: -v to announce version
2250 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2251 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2252 @end menu
2253
2254 @node a
2255 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2256
2257 @kindex -a
2258 @kindex -ac
2259 @kindex -ad
2260 @kindex -ag
2261 @kindex -ah
2262 @kindex -al
2263 @kindex -an
2264 @kindex -as
2265 @cindex listings, enabling
2266 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2267
2268 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2269 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2270 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2271 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2272 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2273 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2274 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2275 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2276 also.
2277
2278 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2279 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2280
2281 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2282 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2283 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2284 omitted from the listing.
2285
2286 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2287 listing.
2288
2289 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2290 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2291 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2292 @code{.sbttl}.
2293 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2294 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2295 listing-control directives have no effect.
2296
2297 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2298 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2299
2300 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2301 because it
2302 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2303 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2304 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2305 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2306 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2307
2308 @node alternate
2309 @section @option{--alternate}
2310
2311 @kindex --alternate
2312 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2313
2314 @node D
2315 @section @option{-D}
2316
2317 @kindex -D
2318 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2319 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2320 @command{@value{AS}}.
2321
2322 @node f
2323 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2324
2325 @kindex -f
2326 @cindex trusted compiler
2327 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2328 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2329 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2330 and comment preprocessing on
2331 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2332 ,Preprocessing}.
2333
2334 @quotation
2335 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2336 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2337 not work correctly.
2338 @end quotation
2339
2340 @node I
2341 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2342
2343 @kindex -I @var{path}
2344 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2345 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2346 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2347 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2348 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2349 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2350 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2351 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2352 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2353 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2354
2355 @node K
2356 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2357
2358 @kindex -K
2359 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2360 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2361 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2362 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2363 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2364 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2365 alteration on other platforms.
2366 @end ifclear
2367
2368 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2369 @cindex difference tables, warning
2370 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2371 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2372 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2373 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2374 is done.
2375 @end ifset
2376
2377 @node L
2378 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2379
2380 @kindex -L
2381 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2382 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2383 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2384 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2385 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2386 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2387 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2388 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2389
2390 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2391 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2392 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2393
2394 @node listing
2395 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2396
2397 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2398 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2399 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2400 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2401 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2402 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2403 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2404 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2405
2406 @table @gcctabopt
2407 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2408 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2409 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2410 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2411 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2412
2413 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2414 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2415 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2416 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2417 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2418 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2419 switch is used the default is to one.
2420
2421 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2422 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2423 @cindex Width of source line output
2424 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2425 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2426 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2427
2428 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2429 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2430 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2431 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2432 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2433 @end table
2434
2435 @node M
2436 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2437
2438 @kindex -M
2439 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2440 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2441 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2442 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2443 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2444 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2445 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2446 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2447 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2448
2449 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2450 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2451 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2452 individually. These are:
2453
2454 @itemize @bullet
2455 @item global symbols in common section
2456
2457 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2458 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2459 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2460 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2461 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2462
2463 @item complex relocations
2464
2465 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2466 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2467 are not support by other object file formats.
2468
2469 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2470
2471 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2472 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2473 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2474 script.
2475
2476 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2477
2478 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2479 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2480
2481 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2482
2483 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2484 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2485 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2486 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2487 assigned within a linker script.
2488 @end itemize
2489
2490 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2491 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2492 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2493
2494 @itemize @bullet
2495
2496 @item EBCDIC strings
2497
2498 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2499
2500 @item packed binary coded decimal
2501
2502 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2503 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2504
2505 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2506
2507 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2508
2509 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2510
2511 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2512
2513 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2514
2515 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2516 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2517 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2518 these options serve no purpose.
2519
2520 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2521
2522 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2523 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2524 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2525
2526 @item other @code{OPT} options
2527
2528 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2529 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2530
2531 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2532
2533 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2534 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2535
2536 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2537
2538 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2539
2540 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2541
2542 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2543
2544 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2545
2546 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2547
2548 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2549
2550 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2551
2552 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2553
2554 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2555
2556 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2557
2558 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2559
2560 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2561
2562 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2563
2564 @end itemize
2565
2566 @node MD
2567 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2568
2569 @kindex --MD
2570 @cindex dependency tracking
2571 @cindex make rules
2572
2573 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2574 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2575 dependencies of the main source file.
2576
2577 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2578
2579 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2580
2581 @node no-pad-sections
2582 @section Output Section Padding
2583 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2584 @cindex output section padding
2585 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2586 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2587 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2588 disable this behaviour.
2589
2590 @node o
2591 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2592
2593 @kindex -o
2594 @cindex naming object file
2595 @cindex object file name
2596 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2597 default it has the name
2598 @ifset GENERIC
2599 @ifset I960
2600 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2601 @end ifset
2602 @ifclear I960
2603 @file{a.out}.
2604 @end ifclear
2605 @end ifset
2606 @ifclear GENERIC
2607 @ifset I960
2608 @file{b.out}.
2609 @end ifset
2610 @ifclear I960
2611 @file{a.out}.
2612 @end ifclear
2613 @end ifclear
2614 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2615 object file a different name.
2616
2617 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2618 existing file of the same name.
2619
2620 @node R
2621 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2622
2623 @kindex -R
2624 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2625 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2626 @cindex joining text and data sections
2627 @cindex merging text and data sections
2628 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2629 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2630 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2631 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2632 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2633 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2634
2635 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2636 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2637 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2638 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2639
2640 @ifset COFF-ELF
2641 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2642 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2643 @samp{.data}.
2644 @end ifset
2645
2646 @ifset HPPA
2647 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2648 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2649 @end ifset
2650
2651 @node statistics
2652 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2653
2654 @kindex --statistics
2655 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2656 @cindex time, total for assembly
2657 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2658 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2659 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2660 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2661 seconds).
2662
2663 @node traditional-format
2664 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2665
2666 @kindex --traditional-format
2667 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2668 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2669 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2670
2671 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2672 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2673
2674 @node v
2675 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2676
2677 @kindex -v
2678 @kindex -version
2679 @cindex assembler version
2680 @cindex version of assembler
2681 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2682 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2683 command line.
2684
2685 @node W
2686 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2687
2688 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2689 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2690 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2691 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2692
2693 @kindex -W
2694 @kindex --no-warn
2695 @cindex suppressing warnings
2696 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2697 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2698 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2699 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2700 are still reported.
2701
2702 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2703 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2704 @cindex warnings, causing error
2705 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2706 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2707
2708 @kindex --warn
2709 @cindex warnings, switching on
2710 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2711 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2712
2713 @node Z
2714 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2715 @cindex object file, after errors
2716 @cindex errors, continuing after
2717 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2718 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2719 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2720 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2721 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2722 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2723
2724 @node Syntax
2725 @chapter Syntax
2726
2727 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2728 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2729 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2730 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2731 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2732 @ifclear VAX
2733 assembler.
2734 @end ifclear
2735 @ifset VAX
2736 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2737 @end ifset
2738
2739 @menu
2740 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2741 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2742 * Comments:: Comments
2743 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2744 * Statements:: Statements
2745 * Constants:: Constants
2746 @end menu
2747
2748 @node Preprocessing
2749 @section Preprocessing
2750
2751 @cindex preprocessing
2752 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2753 @itemize @bullet
2754 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2755 @item
2756 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2757 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2758 a single space.
2759
2760 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2761 @item
2762 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2763 appropriate number of newlines.
2764
2765 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2766 @item
2767 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2768 @end itemize
2769
2770 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2771 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2772 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2773 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2774 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2775 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2776 Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
2777
2778 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2779 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2780 preprocessed.
2781
2782 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2783 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2784 @kindex #NO_APP
2785 @kindex #APP
2786 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2787 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2788 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2789 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2790 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2791 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2792 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2793 and whitespace.
2794
2795 @node Whitespace
2796 @section Whitespace
2797
2798 @cindex whitespace
2799 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2800 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2801 people to read. Unless within character constants
2802 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2803 as exactly one space.
2804
2805 @node Comments
2806 @section Comments
2807
2808 @cindex comments
2809 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2810 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2811
2812 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2813 This means you may not nest these comments.
2814
2815 @smallexample
2816 /*
2817 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2818 is to use this sort of comment.
2819 */
2820
2821 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2822 @end smallexample
2823
2824 @cindex line comment character
2825 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2826 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2827 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2828 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2829 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2830 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2831 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2832 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2833
2834 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2835 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2836 to specify logical line numbers:
2837
2838 @kindex #
2839 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2840 @cindex logical line numbers
2841 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2842 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2843 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2844 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2845 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2846
2847 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2848 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2849
2850 @smallexample
2851 # This is an ordinary comment.
2852 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2853 # This is logical line # 36.
2854 @end smallexample
2855 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2856 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2857
2858 @node Symbol Intro
2859 @section Symbols
2860
2861 @cindex characters used in symbols
2862 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2863 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2864 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2865 @samp{_.$}.
2866 @end ifclear
2867 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2868 @ifclear GENERIC
2869 @ifset H8
2870 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2871 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2872 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2873 symbol names.)
2874 @end ifset
2875 @end ifclear
2876 @end ifset
2877 @ifset GENERIC
2878 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2879 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2880 @end ifset
2881 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2882 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2883 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2884 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2885 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2886
2887 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2888 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2889 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2890 backslash @code{\} character.
2891 @cindex length of symbols
2892
2893 @node Statements
2894 @section Statements
2895
2896 @cindex statements, structure of
2897 @cindex line separator character
2898 @cindex statement separator character
2899
2900 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2901 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2902 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2903 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2904 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2905 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2906 exception: they do not end statements.
2907
2908 @cindex newline, required at file end
2909 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2910 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2911 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2912
2913 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2914
2915 @cindex instructions and directives
2916 @cindex directives and instructions
2917 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2918 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2919 @c 13feb91.
2920 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2921 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2922 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2923 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2924 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2925 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2926 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2927 @ifset GENERIC
2928 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2929 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2930 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2931 language.@refill
2932 @end ifset
2933
2934 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2935 @cindex label (@code{:})
2936 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2937 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2938 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2939
2940 @ifset HPPA
2941 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2942 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2943 only one label may be defined on each line.
2944 @end ifset
2945
2946 @smallexample
2947 label: .directive followed by something
2948 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2949 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2950 @end smallexample
2951
2952 @node Constants
2953 @section Constants
2954
2955 @cindex constants
2956 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2957 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2958 @smallexample
2959 @group
2960 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2961 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2962 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2963 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2964 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2965 @end group
2966 @end smallexample
2967
2968 @menu
2969 * Characters:: Character Constants
2970 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2971 @end menu
2972
2973 @node Characters
2974 @subsection Character Constants
2975
2976 @cindex character constants
2977 @cindex constants, character
2978 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2979 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2980 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2981 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2982 used in arithmetic expressions.
2983
2984 @menu
2985 * Strings:: Strings
2986 * Chars:: Characters
2987 @end menu
2988
2989 @node Strings
2990 @subsubsection Strings
2991
2992 @cindex string constants
2993 @cindex constants, string
2994 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2995 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2996 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2997 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2998 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2999 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
3000 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
3001 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
3002
3003 @cindex escape codes, character
3004 @cindex character escape codes
3005 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
3006 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
3007 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
3008 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
3009 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
3010 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
3011 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
3012 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
3013 @table @kbd
3014 @c @item \a
3015 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
3016 @c
3017 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
3018 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
3019 @item \b
3020 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
3021
3022 @c @item \e
3023 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
3024 @c
3025 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
3026 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
3027 @item backslash-f
3028 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
3029
3030 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
3031 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
3032 @item \n
3033 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
3034
3035 @c @item \p
3036 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
3037 @c
3038 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
3039 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
3040 @item \r
3041 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
3042
3043 @c @item \s
3044 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
3045 @c other assemblers.
3046 @c
3047 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
3048 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
3049 @item \t
3050 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
3051
3052 @c @item \v
3053 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
3054 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3055 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
3056 @c
3057 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
3058 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
3059 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3060 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
3061 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
3062 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
3063
3064 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3065 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3066 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3067 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3068 lower case @code{x} works.
3069
3070 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3071 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3072 @item \\
3073 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3074
3075 @c @item \'
3076 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3077 @c This is needed in single character literals
3078 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3079 @c a @samp{'}.
3080 @c
3081 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3082 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3083 @item \"
3084 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3085 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3086
3087 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3088 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3089 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3090 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3091 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3092 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3093 code and warns you of the fact.
3094 @end table
3095
3096 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3097 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3098 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3099 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3100 sequence.
3101
3102 @node Chars
3103 @subsubsection Characters
3104
3105 @cindex single character constant
3106 @cindex character, single
3107 @cindex constant, single character
3108 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3109 that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3110 @code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3111 as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote. So if you want to write the
3112 character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3113 the second @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3114 accent. A newline
3115 @ifclear GENERIC
3116 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3117 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3118 @end ifclear
3119 @ifset abnormal-separator
3120 @ifset H8
3121 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3122 Renesas SH)
3123 @end ifset
3124 @end ifset
3125 @end ifclear
3126 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3127 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3128 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3129 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3130 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3131
3132 @node Numbers
3133 @subsection Number Constants
3134
3135 @cindex constants, number
3136 @cindex number constants
3137 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3138 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3139 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3140 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3141 are floating point numbers, described below.
3142
3143 @menu
3144 * Integers:: Integers
3145 * Bignums:: Bignums
3146 * Flonums:: Flonums
3147 @ifclear GENERIC
3148 @ifset I960
3149 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
3150 @end ifset
3151 @end ifclear
3152 @end menu
3153
3154 @node Integers
3155 @subsubsection Integers
3156 @cindex integers
3157 @cindex constants, integer
3158
3159 @cindex binary integers
3160 @cindex integers, binary
3161 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3162 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3163
3164 @cindex octal integers
3165 @cindex integers, octal
3166 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3167 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3168
3169 @cindex decimal integers
3170 @cindex integers, decimal
3171 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3172 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3173
3174 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3175 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3176 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3177 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3178
3179 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3180 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3181 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3182
3183 @node Bignums
3184 @subsubsection Bignums
3185
3186 @cindex bignums
3187 @cindex constants, bignum
3188 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3189 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3190 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3191 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3192
3193 @node Flonums
3194 @subsubsection Flonums
3195 @cindex flonums
3196 @cindex floating point numbers
3197 @cindex constants, floating point
3198
3199 @cindex precision, floating point
3200 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3201 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3202 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3203 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3204 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3205 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3206
3207 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3208 @itemize @bullet
3209 @item
3210 The digit @samp{0}.
3211 @ifset HPPA
3212 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3213 @end ifset
3214
3215 @item
3216 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3217 @ifset GENERIC
3218 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3219 @ignore
3220 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3221 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3222 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3223 @end ignore
3224
3225 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3226 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3227 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3228
3229 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3230 (in upper or lower case).
3231
3232 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3233 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3234
3235 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3236 @end ifset
3237 @ifclear GENERIC
3238 @ifset ARC
3239 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3240 @end ifset
3241 @ifset H8
3242 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3243 @end ifset
3244 @ifset HPPA
3245 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3246 @end ifset
3247 @ifset I960
3248 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3249 @end ifset
3250 @end ifclear
3251
3252 @item
3253 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3254
3255 @item
3256 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3257
3258 @item
3259 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3260 or more decimal digits.
3261
3262 @item
3263 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3264
3265 @itemize @bullet
3266 @item
3267 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3268 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3269 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3270 @item
3271 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3272 @item
3273 One or more decimal digits.
3274 @end itemize
3275
3276 @end itemize
3277
3278 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3279 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3280
3281 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3282 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3283 @command{@value{AS}}.
3284
3285 @ifclear GENERIC
3286 @ifset I960
3287 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3288 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3289 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3290 @node Bit Fields
3291 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3292
3293 @cindex bit fields
3294 @cindex constants, bit field
3295 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3296 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3297 @example
3298 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3299 @end example
3300 @noindent
3301 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3302 @var{value}.
3303
3304 The resulting number is then packed
3305 @ifset GENERIC
3306 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3307 (in host-dependent byte order)
3308 @end ifset
3309 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3310 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3311 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3312 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3313 least significant digits.@refill
3314
3315 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3316 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3317 @end ifset
3318 @end ifclear
3319
3320 @node Sections
3321 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3322 @cindex sections
3323 @cindex relocation
3324
3325 @menu
3326 * Secs Background:: Background
3327 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3328 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3329 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3330 * bss:: bss Section
3331 @end menu
3332
3333 @node Secs Background
3334 @section Background
3335
3336 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3337 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3338 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3339
3340 @cindex linker, and assembler
3341 @cindex assembler, and linker
3342 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3343 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3344 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3345 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3346 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3347 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3348 sections.
3349
3350 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3351 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3352 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3353 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3354 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3355 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3356 the proper run-time addresses.
3357 @ifset H8
3358 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3359 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3360 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3361 @end ifset
3362
3363 @cindex standard assembler sections
3364 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3365 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3366 @dfn{bss} sections.
3367
3368 @ifset COFF-ELF
3369 @ifset GENERIC
3370 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3371 @end ifset
3372 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3373 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3374 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3375 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3376 @end ifset
3377
3378 @ifset HPPA
3379 @ifset GENERIC
3380 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3381 @end ifset
3382 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3383 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3384 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3385 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3386 assembler directives.
3387
3388 @ifset SOM
3389 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3390 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3391 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3392 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3393 @end ifset
3394 @end ifset
3395
3396 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3397 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3398
3399 @ifset HPPA
3400 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3401 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3402 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3403 @end ifset
3404
3405 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3406 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3407 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3408 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3409 file is mentioned:
3410 @itemize @bullet
3411 @item
3412 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3413 an address?
3414 @item
3415 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3416 @item
3417 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3418 @display
3419 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3420 @end display
3421 @item
3422 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3423 @end itemize
3424
3425 @cindex addresses, format of
3426 @cindex section-relative addressing
3427 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3428 @display
3429 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3430 @end display
3431 @noindent
3432 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3433 nature.
3434 @ifset SOM
3435 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3436 symbol-relative instead.)
3437 @end ifset
3438
3439 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3440 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3441
3442 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3443 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3444 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3445 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3446 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3447 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3448 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3449 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3450 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3451
3452 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3453 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3454 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3455 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3456 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3457 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3458 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3459
3460 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3461 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3462 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3463 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3464 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3465 data and bss sections.
3466
3467 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3468 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3469
3470 @node Ld Sections
3471 @section Linker Sections
3472 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3473
3474 @table @strong
3475
3476 @ifset COFF-ELF
3477 @cindex named sections
3478 @cindex sections, named
3479 @item named sections
3480 @end ifset
3481 @ifset aout-bout
3482 @cindex text section
3483 @cindex data section
3484 @itemx text section
3485 @itemx data section
3486 @end ifset
3487 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3488 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3489 true of another.
3490 @c @ifset aout-bout
3491 When the program is running, however, it is
3492 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3493 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3494 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3495 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3496 in the data section.
3497 @c @end ifset
3498
3499 @cindex bss section
3500 @item bss section
3501 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3502 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3503 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3504 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3505 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3506 those explicit zeros from object files.
3507
3508 @cindex absolute section
3509 @item absolute section
3510 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3511 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3512 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3513 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3514
3515 @cindex undefined section
3516 @item undefined section
3517 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3518 the preceding sections.
3519 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3520 @end table
3521
3522 @cindex relocation example
3523 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3524 @ifset COFF-ELF
3525 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3526 @end ifset
3527 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3528
3529 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3530 @ifnottex
3531 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3532 @smallexample
3533 +-----+----+--+
3534 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3535 +-----+----+--+
3536
3537 text data bss
3538 seg. seg. seg.
3539
3540 +---+---+---+
3541 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3542 +---+---+---+
3543
3544 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3545 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3546 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3547
3548 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3549 @end smallexample
3550 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3551 @end ifnottex
3552 @need 5000
3553 @tex
3554 \bigskip
3555 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3556 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3557 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3558
3559 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3560 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3561 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3562
3563 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3564 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3565 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3566 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3567 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3568
3569 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3570 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3571
3572 @end tex
3573 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3574
3575 @node As Sections
3576 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3577
3578 @cindex internal assembler sections
3579 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3580 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3581 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3582 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3583 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3584 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3585 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3586 section-relative address.
3587
3588 @table @b
3589 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3590 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3591 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3592 bug in the assembler.
3593
3594 @cindex expr (internal section)
3595 @item expr section
3596 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3597 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3598 it in the expr section.
3599 @c FIXME item debug
3600 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3601 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3602 @c FIXME item register
3603 @end table
3604
3605 @node Sub-Sections
3606 @section Sub-Sections
3607
3608 @cindex numbered subsections
3609 @cindex grouping data
3610 @ifset aout-bout
3611 Assembled bytes
3612 @ifset COFF-ELF
3613 conventionally
3614 @end ifset
3615 fall into two sections: text and data.
3616 @end ifset
3617 You may have separate groups of
3618 @ifset GENERIC
3619 data in named sections
3620 @end ifset
3621 @ifclear GENERIC
3622 @ifclear aout-bout
3623 data in named sections
3624 @end ifclear
3625 @ifset aout-bout
3626 text or data
3627 @end ifset
3628 @end ifclear
3629 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3630 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3631 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3632 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3633 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3634 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3635 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3636 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3637 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3638 constants being output.
3639
3640 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3641 goes in subsection number zero.
3642
3643 @ifset GENERIC
3644 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3645 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3646 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3647 @end ifset
3648 @ifclear GENERIC
3649 @ifset H8
3650 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3651 boundary (two bytes).
3652 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3653 @end ifset
3654 @ifset I960
3655 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3656 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3657 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3658 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3659 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3660 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3661 @end ifset
3662 @end ifclear
3663
3664 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3665 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3666 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3667 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3668 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3669 data subsections as a data section.
3670
3671 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3672 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3673 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3674 @ifset COFF
3675 @ifset GENERIC
3676 When generating COFF output, you
3677 @end ifset
3678 @ifclear GENERIC
3679 You
3680 @end ifclear
3681 can also use an extra subsection
3682 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3683 @var{expression}}.
3684 @end ifset
3685 @ifset ELF
3686 @ifset GENERIC
3687 When generating ELF output, you
3688 @end ifset
3689 @ifclear GENERIC
3690 You
3691 @end ifclear
3692 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3693 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3694 @end ifset
3695 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3696 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3697 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3698 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3699 @smallexample
3700 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3701 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3702 .text 1
3703 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3704 .data 0
3705 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3706 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3707 .text 0
3708 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3709 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3710 @end smallexample
3711
3712 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3713 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3714 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3715 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3716 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3717 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3718 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3719
3720 @node bss
3721 @section bss Section
3722
3723 @cindex bss section
3724 @cindex common variable storage
3725 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3726 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3727 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3728 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3729 section are zeroed bytes.
3730
3731 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3732 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3733
3734 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3735 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3736
3737 @ifset GENERIC
3738 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3739 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3740 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3741 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3742 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3743 @end ifset
3744
3745 @node Symbols
3746 @chapter Symbols
3747
3748 @cindex symbols
3749 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3750 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3751 to debug.
3752
3753 @quotation
3754 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3755 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3756 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3757 @end quotation
3758
3759 @menu
3760 * Labels:: Labels
3761 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3762 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3763 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3764 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3765 @end menu
3766
3767 @node Labels
3768 @section Labels
3769
3770 @cindex labels
3771 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3772 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3773 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3774 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3775 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3776 definitions.
3777
3778 @ifset HPPA
3779 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3780 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3781 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3782 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3783 @end ifset
3784
3785 @node Setting Symbols
3786 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3787
3788 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3789 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3790 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3791 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3792 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3793 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3794 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3795 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3796
3797 @ifset Blackfin
3798 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3799 @end ifset
3800
3801 @node Symbol Names
3802 @section Symbol Names
3803
3804 @cindex symbol names
3805 @cindex names, symbol
3806 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3807 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3808 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3809 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3810 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3811 particular target machine), and underscores.
3812 @end ifclear
3813 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3814 @ifset H8
3815 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3816 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3817 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3818 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3819 @end ifset
3820 @end ifset
3821
3822 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3823 than @code{Foo}.
3824
3825 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3826 Local Labels. See below.
3827
3828 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3829 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3830 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3831 currently supported.
3832
3833 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3834 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3835 in a program.
3836
3837 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3838
3839 @cindex local symbol names
3840 @cindex symbol names, local
3841 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3842 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3843 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3844 set of local label prefixes.
3845 @ifset HPPA
3846 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3847 @end ifset
3848
3849 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3850 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3851 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3852 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3853
3854 @subheading Local Labels
3855
3856 @cindex local labels
3857 @cindex temporary symbol names
3858 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3859 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3860 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3861 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3862 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3863 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3864 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3865 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3866 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3867 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3868
3869 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3870 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3871 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3872 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3873 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3874 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3875 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3876
3877 Here is an example:
3878
3879 @smallexample
3880 1: branch 1f
3881 2: branch 1b
3882 1: branch 2f
3883 2: branch 1b
3884 @end smallexample
3885
3886 Which is the equivalent of:
3887
3888 @smallexample
3889 label_1: branch label_3
3890 label_2: branch label_1
3891 label_3: branch label_4
3892 label_4: branch label_3
3893 @end smallexample
3894
3895 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3896 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3897 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3898 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3899 these parts:
3900
3901 @table @code
3902 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3903 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3904 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3905 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3906 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3907 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3908 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3909 you may use them in debugging.
3910
3911 @item @var{number}
3912 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3913 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3914
3915 @item @kbd{C-B}
3916 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3917 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3918
3919 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3920 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3921 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3922 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3923 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3924 @end table
3925
3926 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3927 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3928
3929 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3930 @cindex dollar local symbols
3931
3932 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3933 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3934 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3935 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3936 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3937 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3938
3939 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3940 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3941 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3942
3943 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3944 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3945 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3946 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3947
3948 @node Dot
3949 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3950
3951 @cindex dot (symbol)
3952 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3953 @cindex current address
3954 @cindex location counter
3955 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3956 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3957 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3958 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3959 directive.
3960 @ifclear no-space-dir
3961 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3962 @samp{.space 4}.
3963 @end ifclear
3964
3965 @node Symbol Attributes
3966 @section Symbol Attributes
3967
3968 @cindex symbol attributes
3969 @cindex attributes, symbol
3970 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3971 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3972 attributes.
3973 @ifset INTERNALS
3974 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3975 @end ifset
3976
3977 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3978 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3979 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3980 would want.
3981
3982 @menu
3983 * Symbol Value:: Value
3984 * Symbol Type:: Type
3985 @ifset aout-bout
3986 @ifset GENERIC
3987 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3988 @end ifset
3989 @ifclear GENERIC
3990 @ifclear BOUT
3991 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3992 @end ifclear
3993 @ifset BOUT
3994 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3995 @end ifset
3996 @end ifclear
3997 @end ifset
3998 @ifset COFF
3999 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
4000 @end ifset
4001 @ifset SOM
4002 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
4003 @end ifset
4004 @end menu
4005
4006 @node Symbol Value
4007 @subsection Value
4008
4009 @cindex value of a symbol
4010 @cindex symbol value
4011 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
4012 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
4013 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
4014 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
4015 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
4016 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
4017 called absolute.
4018
4019 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
4020 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
4021 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
4022 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
4023 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
4024 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
4025 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
4026 allocated storage.
4027
4028 @node Symbol Type
4029 @subsection Type
4030
4031 @cindex type of a symbol
4032 @cindex symbol type
4033 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
4034 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
4035 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
4036 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
4037
4038 @ifset aout-bout
4039 @ifclear GENERIC
4040 @ifset BOUT
4041 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
4042 @c better if it were available outside examples.
4043 @need 1000
4044 @node a.out Symbols
4045 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
4046
4047 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
4048 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
4049 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
4050 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
4051 @code{b.out}.
4052
4053 @end ifset
4054 @ifclear BOUT
4055 @node a.out Symbols
4056 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4057
4058 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4059 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4060
4061 @end ifclear
4062 @end ifclear
4063 @ifset GENERIC
4064 @node a.out Symbols
4065 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4066
4067 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4068 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4069
4070 @end ifset
4071 @menu
4072 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
4073 * Symbol Other:: Other
4074 @end menu
4075
4076 @node Symbol Desc
4077 @subsubsection Descriptor
4078
4079 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4080 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
4081 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4082 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
4083 @command{@value{AS}}.
4084
4085 @node Symbol Other
4086 @subsubsection Other
4087
4088 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4089 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4090 @end ifset
4091
4092 @ifset COFF
4093 @node COFF Symbols
4094 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4095
4096 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
4097 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4098
4099 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4100 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4101 @code{.endef} directives.
4102
4103 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
4104
4105 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4106 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4107 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4108
4109 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4110
4111 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4112 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4113 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4114 table information for COFF.
4115 @end ifset
4116
4117 @ifset SOM
4118 @node SOM Symbols
4119 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4120
4121 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4122 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4123
4124 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4125 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4126
4127 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4128 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4129 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4130 @end ifset
4131
4132 @node Expressions
4133 @chapter Expressions
4134
4135 @cindex expressions
4136 @cindex addresses
4137 @cindex numeric values
4138 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4139 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4140
4141 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4142 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4143 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4144 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4145 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4146 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4147
4148 @menu
4149 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4150 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4151 @end menu
4152
4153 @node Empty Exprs
4154 @section Empty Expressions
4155
4156 @cindex empty expressions
4157 @cindex expressions, empty
4158 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4159 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4160 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4161 is compatible with other assemblers.
4162
4163 @node Integer Exprs
4164 @section Integer Expressions
4165
4166 @cindex integer expressions
4167 @cindex expressions, integer
4168 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4169 by @emph{operators}.
4170
4171 @menu
4172 * Arguments:: Arguments
4173 * Operators:: Operators
4174 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4175 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4176 @end menu
4177
4178 @node Arguments
4179 @subsection Arguments
4180
4181 @cindex expression arguments
4182 @cindex arguments in expressions
4183 @cindex operands in expressions
4184 @cindex arithmetic operands
4185 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4186 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4187 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4188 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4189 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4190 instruction operands.
4191
4192 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4193 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4194 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4195 integer.
4196
4197 Numbers are usually integers.
4198
4199 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4200 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4201 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4202 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4203 assemblers.
4204
4205 @cindex subexpressions
4206 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4207 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4208 operator followed by an argument.
4209
4210 @node Operators
4211 @subsection Operators
4212
4213 @cindex operators, in expressions
4214 @cindex arithmetic functions
4215 @cindex functions, in expressions
4216 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4217 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4218 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4219 whitespace.
4220
4221 @node Prefix Ops
4222 @subsection Prefix Operator
4223
4224 @cindex prefix operators
4225 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4226 one argument, which must be absolute.
4227
4228 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4229 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4230 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4231 @tex
4232 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4233 @end tex
4234
4235 @table @code
4236 @item -
4237 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4238 @item ~
4239 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4240 @end table
4241
4242 @tex
4243 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4244 @end tex
4245
4246 @node Infix Ops
4247 @subsection Infix Operators
4248
4249 @cindex infix operators
4250 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4251 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4252 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4253 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4254 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4255
4256 @enumerate
4257 @cindex operator precedence
4258 @cindex precedence of operators
4259
4260 @item
4261 Highest Precedence
4262
4263 @table @code
4264 @item *
4265 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4266
4267 @item /
4268 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4269
4270 @item %
4271 @dfn{Remainder}.
4272
4273 @item <<
4274 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4275
4276 @item >>
4277 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4278 @end table
4279
4280 @item
4281 Intermediate precedence
4282
4283 @table @code
4284 @item |
4285
4286 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4287
4288 @item &
4289 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4290
4291 @item ^
4292 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4293
4294 @item !
4295 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4296 @end table
4297
4298 @item
4299 Low Precedence
4300
4301 @table @code
4302 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4303 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4304 @cindex arguments for addition
4305 @item +
4306 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4307 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4308 sections.
4309
4310 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4311 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4312 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4313 @item -
4314 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4315 result has the section of the left argument.
4316 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4317 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4318 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4319
4320 @cindex comparison expressions
4321 @cindex expressions, comparison
4322 @item ==
4323 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4324 @item <>
4325 @itemx !=
4326 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4327 @item <
4328 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4329 @item >
4330 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4331 @item >=
4332 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4333 @item <=
4334 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4335
4336 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4337 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4338 perform signed comparisons.
4339 @end table
4340
4341 @item Lowest Precedence
4342
4343 @table @code
4344 @item &&
4345 @dfn{Logical And}.
4346
4347 @item ||
4348 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4349
4350 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4351 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4352 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4353 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4354
4355 @end table
4356 @end enumerate
4357
4358 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4359 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4360
4361 @node Pseudo Ops
4362 @chapter Assembler Directives
4363
4364 @cindex directives, machine independent
4365 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4366 @cindex machine independent directives
4367 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4368 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4369 in lower case.
4370
4371 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4372 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4373 @ifset GENERIC
4374 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4375 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4376 @end ifset
4377 @ifclear GENERIC
4378 @ifset machine-directives
4379 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4380 @end ifset
4381 @end ifclear
4382
4383 @menu
4384 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4385 @ifset COFF
4386 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4387 @end ifset
4388
4389 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4390 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4391 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4392 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4393 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4394 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4395 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4396 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4397 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4398 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4399 @ifset COFF
4400 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4401 @end ifset
4402 @ifset aout-bout
4403 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4404 @end ifset
4405 @ifset COFF
4406 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4407 @end ifset
4408
4409 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4410 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4411 * Else:: @code{.else}
4412 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4413 * End:: @code{.end}
4414 @ifset COFF
4415 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4416 @end ifset
4417
4418 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4419 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4420 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4421 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4422 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4423 * Err:: @code{.err}
4424 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4425 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4426 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4427 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4428 * File:: @code{.file}
4429 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4430 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4431 * Func:: @code{.func}
4432 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4433 @ifset ELF
4434 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4435 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4436 @end ifset
4437
4438 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4439 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4440 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4441 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4442 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4443 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4444 @ifset ELF
4445 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4446 @end ifset
4447
4448 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4449 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4450 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4451 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4452 @ifclear no-line-dir
4453 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4454 @end ifclear
4455
4456 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4457 * List:: @code{.list}
4458 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4459 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4460 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4461 @ifset ELF
4462 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4463 @end ifset
4464
4465 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4466 @ignore
4467 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4468 @end ignore
4469
4470 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4471 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4472 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4473 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4474 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4475 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4476 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4477 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4478 @ifset ELF
4479 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4480 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4481 @end ifset
4482
4483 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4484 @ifset ELF
4485 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4486 @end ifset
4487
4488 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4489 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4490 @ifset ELF
4491 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4492 @end ifset
4493
4494 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4495 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4496 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4497 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4498 @ifset COFF
4499 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4500 @end ifset
4501 @ifset COFF-ELF
4502 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4503 @end ifset
4504
4505 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4506 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4507 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4508 @ifset COFF-ELF
4509 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4510 @end ifset
4511 @ifclear no-space-dir
4512 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4513 @end ifclear
4514
4515 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4516 @ifclear no-space-dir
4517 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4518 @end ifclear
4519 @ifset have-stabs
4520 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4521 @end ifset
4522
4523 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4524 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4525 @ifset ELF
4526 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4527 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4528 @end ifset
4529
4530 @ifset COFF
4531 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4532 @end ifset
4533
4534 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4535 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4536 @ifset COFF-ELF
4537 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4538 @end ifset
4539
4540 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4541 @ifset COFF
4542 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4543 @end ifset
4544
4545 @ifset ELF
4546 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4547 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4548 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4549 @end ifset
4550
4551 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4552 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4553 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4554 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4555 @ifclear no-space-dir
4556 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4557 @end ifclear
4558 @ifset ELF
4559 * 2byte:: @code{.2byte @var{expressions}}
4560 * 4byte:: @code{.4byte @var{expressions}}
4561 * 8byte:: @code{.8byte @var{bignums}}
4562 @end ifset
4563 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4564 @end menu
4565
4566 @node Abort
4567 @section @code{.abort}
4568
4569 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4570 @cindex stopping the assembly
4571 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4572 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4573 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4574 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4575 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4576
4577 @ifset COFF
4578 @node ABORT (COFF)
4579 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4580
4581 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4582 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4583 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4584
4585 @ifset BOUT
4586 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4587 but ignores it.
4588 @end ifset
4589 @end ifset
4590
4591 @node Align
4592 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4593
4594 @cindex padding the location counter
4595 @cindex @code{align} directive
4596 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4597 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4598 required, as described below.
4599
4600 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4601 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4602 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4603 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4604 with no-op instructions.
4605
4606 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4607 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4608 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4609 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4610 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4611 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4612 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4613
4614 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4615 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4616 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4617 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4618 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4619 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4620 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4621
4622 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4623 strongarm, it is the
4624 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4625 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4626 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4627 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4628
4629 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4630 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4631 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4632 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4633 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4634
4635 @node Altmacro
4636 @section @code{.altmacro}
4637 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4638
4639 @ftable @code
4640 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4641 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4642 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4643 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4644 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4645 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4646 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4647
4648 @item String delimiters
4649 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4650 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4651
4652 @table @code
4653 @item '@var{string}'
4654 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4655
4656 @item <@var{string}>
4657 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4658 @end table
4659
4660 @item single-character string escape
4661 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4662 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4663 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4664 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4665
4666 @item Expression results as strings
4667 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4668 and use the result as a string.
4669 @end ftable
4670
4671 @node Ascii
4672 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4673
4674 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4675 @cindex string literals
4676 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4677 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4678 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4679
4680 @node Asciz
4681 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4682
4683 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4684 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4685 @cindex null-terminated strings
4686 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4687 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4688
4689 @node Balign
4690 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4691
4692 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4693 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4694 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4695 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4696 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4697 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4698 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4699
4700 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4701 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4702 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4703 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4704 with no-op instructions.
4705
4706 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4707 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4708 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4709 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4710 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4711 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4712 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4713
4714 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4715 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4716 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4717 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4718 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4719 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4720 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4721 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4722 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4723 undefined.
4724
4725 @node Bundle directives
4726 @section Bundle directives
4727 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4728 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4729 @cindex bundle
4730 @cindex instruction bundle
4731 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4732 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4733 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4734 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4735 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4736 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4737 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4738
4739 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4740 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4741 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4742 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4743 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4744 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4745 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4746 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4747 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4748 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4749 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4750
4751 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4752 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4753 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4754 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4755 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4756 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4757 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4758 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4759 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4760
4761 @cindex bundle-locked
4762 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4763 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4764 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4765 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4766 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4767 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4768 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4769 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4770 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4771 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4772 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4773 bundle size.
4774
4775 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4776 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4777 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4778 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4779 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4780 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4781
4782 @node Byte
4783 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4784
4785 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4786 @cindex integers, one byte
4787 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4788 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4789
4790 @node CFI directives
4791 @section CFI directives
4792 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4793 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4794 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4795 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4796 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4797 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4798 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4799 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4800
4801 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4802 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4803
4804 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4805 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4806
4807 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4808 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4809 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4810 redefine it will result in an error.
4811
4812 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4813 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4814 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4815 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4816 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4817 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4818
4819 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4820 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4821
4822 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4823 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4824 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4825 unwind entry previously opened by
4826 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4827
4828 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4829 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4830 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4831 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4832 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4833 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4834 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4835 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4836 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4837 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4838 no personality routine.
4839
4840 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4841 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4842 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4843 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4844 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4845 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4846
4847 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4848 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4849 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4850 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4851 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4852 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4853 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4854 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4855
4856 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4857 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4858 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4859 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4860 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4861 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4862 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4863
4864 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4865 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4866 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4867 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4868 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4869 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4870
4871 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4872 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4873 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4874 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4875 by a section directive.
4876
4877 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4878 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4879 @code{.p2align} directive.
4880
4881 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4882 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4883 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4884
4885 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4886 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4887 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4888 remains the same.
4889
4890 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4891 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4892 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4893 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4894 CFA address.
4895
4896 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4897 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4898 value that is added/subtracted from the previous offset.
4899
4900 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4901 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4902 CFA.
4903
4904 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4905 Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4906
4907 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4908 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4909 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4910 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4911 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4912 code it's annotating.
4913
4914 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4915 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4916
4917 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4918 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4919 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4920 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4921
4922 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4923 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4924
4925 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4926 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4927 i.e. no restoration needed.
4928
4929 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4930 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4931 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4932 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4933 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4934 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4935 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4936
4937 @smallexample
4938 je label
4939 popq %rbx
4940 .cfi_restore %rbx
4941 popq %r12
4942 .cfi_restore %r12
4943 popq %rbp
4944 .cfi_restore %rbp
4945 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4946 ret
4947 label:
4948 /* Do something else */
4949 @end smallexample
4950
4951 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4952 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4953 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4954 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4955 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4956 we can write:
4957
4958 @smallexample
4959 je label
4960 popq %rbx
4961 .cfi_remember_state
4962 .cfi_restore %rbx
4963 popq %r12
4964 .cfi_restore %r12
4965 popq %rbp
4966 .cfi_restore %rbp
4967 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4968 ret
4969 label:
4970 .cfi_restore_state
4971 /* Do something else */
4972 @end smallexample
4973
4974 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4975 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4976 @code{.cfi} directives.
4977
4978 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4979 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4980 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4981
4982 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4983 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4984
4985 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4986 SPARC register window has been saved.
4987
4988 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4989 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4990 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4991 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4992
4993 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4994 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4995 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4996 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4997
4998 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4999 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
5000 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
5001 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
5002 or another register.
5003
5004 @node Comm
5005 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
5006
5007 @cindex @code{comm} directive
5008 @cindex symbol, common
5009 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
5010 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
5011 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
5012 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
5013 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
5014 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
5015 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
5016 using the largest size.
5017
5018 @ifset COFF-ELF
5019 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
5020 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
5021 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
5022 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
5023 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
5024 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
5025 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
5026 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
5027 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
5028 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
5029 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
5030 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
5031 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
5032 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
5033 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
5034 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
5035 @end ifset
5036
5037 @ifset HPPA
5038 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5039 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5040 @end ifset
5041
5042 @node Data
5043 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
5044
5045 @cindex @code{data} directive
5046 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
5047 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
5048 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
5049 to zero.
5050
5051 @ifset COFF
5052 @node Def
5053 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
5054
5055 @cindex @code{def} directive
5056 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
5057 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
5058 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
5059 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5060 @ifset BOUT
5061
5062 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
5063 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
5064 but ignored.
5065 @end ifset
5066 @end ifset
5067
5068 @ifset aout-bout
5069 @node Desc
5070 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5071
5072 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5073 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5074 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5075 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5076 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5077
5078 @ifset COFF
5079 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5080 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5081 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5082 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5083 @end ifset
5084 @end ifset
5085
5086 @ifset COFF
5087 @node Dim
5088 @section @code{.dim}
5089
5090 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5091 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5092 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5093 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5094 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5095 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5096 @ifset BOUT
5097
5098 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
5099 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
5100 ignores it.
5101 @end ifset
5102 @end ifset
5103
5104 @node Double
5105 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5106
5107 @cindex @code{double} directive
5108 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5109 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5110 assembles floating point numbers.
5111 @ifset GENERIC
5112 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5113 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5114 @end ifset
5115 @ifclear GENERIC
5116 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5117 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5118 in @sc{ieee} format.
5119 @end ifset
5120 @end ifclear
5121
5122 @node Eject
5123 @section @code{.eject}
5124
5125 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5126 @cindex new page, in listings
5127 @cindex page, in listings
5128 @cindex listing control: new page
5129 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5130
5131 @node Else
5132 @section @code{.else}
5133
5134 @cindex @code{else} directive
5135 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5136 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5137 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5138 was false.
5139
5140 @node Elseif
5141 @section @code{.elseif}
5142
5143 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5144 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5145 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5146 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5147
5148 @node End
5149 @section @code{.end}
5150
5151 @cindex @code{end} directive
5152 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5153 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5154
5155 @ifset COFF
5156 @node Endef
5157 @section @code{.endef}
5158
5159 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5160 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5161 @code{.def}.
5162 @ifset BOUT
5163
5164 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
5165 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
5166 directive but ignores it.
5167 @end ifset
5168 @end ifset
5169
5170 @node Endfunc
5171 @section @code{.endfunc}
5172 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5173 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5174
5175 @node Endif
5176 @section @code{.endif}
5177
5178 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5179 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5180 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5181 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5182
5183 @node Equ
5184 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5185
5186 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5187 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5188 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5189 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5190 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5191
5192 @ifset HPPA
5193 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5194 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5195 @end ifset
5196
5197 @ifset Z80
5198 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5199 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5200 On the Z80 it is an error if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5201 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5202 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5203 @end ifset
5204
5205 @node Equiv
5206 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5207 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5208 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5209 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5210 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5211 undefined.
5212
5213 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5214 @smallexample
5215 .ifdef SYM
5216 .err
5217 .endif
5218 .equ SYM,VAL
5219 @end smallexample
5220 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5221
5222 @node Eqv
5223 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5224 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5225 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5226 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5227 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5228 value is taken.
5229
5230 @node Err
5231 @section @code{.err}
5232 @cindex @code{err} directive
5233 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5234 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5235 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5236
5237 @node Error
5238 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5239 @cindex error directive
5240
5241 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5242 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5243 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5244 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5245
5246 @smallexample
5247 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5248 @end smallexample
5249
5250 @node Exitm
5251 @section @code{.exitm}
5252 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5253
5254 @node Extern
5255 @section @code{.extern}
5256
5257 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5258 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5259 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5260 all undefined symbols as external.
5261
5262 @node Fail
5263 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5264
5265 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5266 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5267 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5268 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5269 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5270 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5271
5272 @node File
5273 @section @code{.file}
5274 @cindex @code{file} directive
5275
5276 @ifclear no-file-dir
5277 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5278 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5279 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5280
5281 @subheading Default Version
5282
5283 @cindex logical file name
5284 @cindex file name, logical
5285 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5286 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5287
5288 @smallexample
5289 .file @var{string}
5290 @end smallexample
5291
5292 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5293 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5294 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5295 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5296 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5297
5298 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5299 @end ifclear
5300
5301 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5302 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5303
5304 @smallexample
5305 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5306 @end smallexample
5307
5308 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5309 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5310 literal.
5311
5312 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5313 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5314 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5315 entries will have.
5316
5317 @node Fill
5318 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5319
5320 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5321 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5322 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5323 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5324 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5325 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5326 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5327 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5328 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5329 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5330 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5331 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5332 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5333 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5334
5335 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5336 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5337 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5338 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5339
5340 @node Float
5341 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5342
5343 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5344 @cindex @code{float} directive
5345 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5346 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5347 @ifset GENERIC
5348 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5349 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5350 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5351 @end ifset
5352 @ifclear GENERIC
5353 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5354 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5355 in @sc{ieee} format.
5356 @end ifset
5357 @end ifclear
5358
5359 @node Func
5360 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5361 @cindex @code{func} directive
5362 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5363 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5364 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5365 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5366 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5367 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5368 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5369 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5370
5371 @node Global
5372 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5373
5374 @cindex @code{global} directive
5375 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5376 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5377 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5378 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5379 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5380 from another file linked into the same program.
5381
5382 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5383 compatibility with other assemblers.
5384
5385 @ifset HPPA
5386 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5387 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5388 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5389 @end ifset
5390
5391 @ifset ELF
5392 @node Gnu_attribute
5393 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5394 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5395
5396 @node Hidden
5397 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5398
5399 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5400 @cindex visibility
5401 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5402 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5403 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5404
5405 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5406 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5407 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5408 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5409 @end ifset
5410
5411 @node hword
5412 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5413
5414 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5415 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5416 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5417 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5418 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5419 a 16 bit number for each.
5420
5421 @ifset GENERIC
5422 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5423 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5424 @end ifset
5425 @ifclear GENERIC
5426 @ifset W32
5427 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5428 @end ifset
5429 @ifset W16
5430 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5431 @end ifset
5432 @end ifclear
5433
5434 @node Ident
5435 @section @code{.ident}
5436
5437 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5438
5439 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5440 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5441 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5442 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5443 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5444 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5445 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5446
5447 @node If
5448 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5449
5450 @cindex conditional assembly
5451 @cindex @code{if} directive
5452 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5453 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5454 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5455 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5456 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5457 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5458 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5459 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5460
5461 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5462 @table @code
5463 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5464 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5465 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5466 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5467 is considered to be undefined.
5468
5469 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5470 @item .ifb @var{text}
5471 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5472
5473 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5474 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5475 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5476 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5477 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5478 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5479 string comparison is case sensitive.
5480
5481 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5482 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5483 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5484
5485 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5486 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5487 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5488
5489 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5490 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5491 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5492 equal to zero.
5493
5494 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5495 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5496 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5497
5498 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5499 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5500 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5501 to zero.
5502
5503 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5504 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5505 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5506
5507 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5508 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5509 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5510 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5511
5512 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5513 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5514 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5515 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5516
5517 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5518 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5519 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5520 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5521 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5522 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5523 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5524
5525 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5526 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5527 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5528 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5529
5530 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5531 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5532 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5533 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5534 @end table
5535
5536 @node Incbin
5537 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5538
5539 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5540 @cindex binary files, including
5541 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5542 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5543 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5544 around @var{file}.
5545
5546 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5547 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5548 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5549 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5550 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5551
5552 @node Include
5553 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5554
5555 @cindex @code{include} directive
5556 @cindex supporting files, including
5557 @cindex files, including
5558 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5559 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5560 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5561 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5562 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5563 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5564 around @var{file}.
5565
5566 @node Int
5567 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5568
5569 @cindex @code{int} directive
5570 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5571 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5572 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5573 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5574 of target the assembly is for.
5575
5576 @ifclear GENERIC
5577 @ifset H8
5578 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5579 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5580 32-bit integers.
5581 @end ifset
5582 @end ifclear
5583
5584 @ifset ELF
5585 @node Internal
5586 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5587
5588 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5589 @cindex visibility
5590 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5591 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5592 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5593
5594 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5595 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5596 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5597 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5598 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5599 @end ifset
5600
5601 @node Irp
5602 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5603
5604 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5605 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5606 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5607 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5608 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5609 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5610 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5611 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5612
5613 For example, assembling
5614
5615 @example
5616 .irp param,1,2,3
5617 move d\param,sp@@-
5618 .endr
5619 @end example
5620
5621 is equivalent to assembling
5622
5623 @example
5624 move d1,sp@@-
5625 move d2,sp@@-
5626 move d3,sp@@-
5627 @end example
5628
5629 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5630
5631 @node Irpc
5632 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5633
5634 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5635 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5636 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5637 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5638 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5639 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5640 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5641 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5642
5643 For example, assembling
5644
5645 @example
5646 .irpc param,123
5647 move d\param,sp@@-
5648 .endr
5649 @end example
5650
5651 is equivalent to assembling
5652
5653 @example
5654 move d1,sp@@-
5655 move d2,sp@@-
5656 move d3,sp@@-
5657 @end example
5658
5659 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5660 at @xref{Macro}.
5661
5662 @node Lcomm
5663 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5664
5665 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5666 @cindex local common symbols
5667 @cindex symbols, local common
5668 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5669 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5670 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5671 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5672 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5673 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5674
5675 @ifset GENERIC
5676 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5677 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5678 @end ifset
5679
5680 @ifset HPPA
5681 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5682 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5683 @end ifset
5684
5685 @node Lflags
5686 @section @code{.lflags}
5687
5688 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5689 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5690 assemblers, but ignores it.
5691
5692 @ifclear no-line-dir
5693 @node Line
5694 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5695
5696 @cindex @code{line} directive
5697 @cindex logical line number
5698 @ifset aout-bout
5699 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5700 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5701 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5702 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5703 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5704 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5705 @end ifset
5706
5707 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5708 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5709 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5710 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5711 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5712
5713 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5714 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5715 debugging.
5716 @end ifclear
5717
5718 @node Linkonce
5719 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5720 @cindex COMDAT
5721 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5722 @cindex common sections
5723 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5724 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5725 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5726 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5727 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5728 unique.
5729
5730 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5731 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5732 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5733
5734 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5735 following strings. For example:
5736 @smallexample
5737 .linkonce same_size
5738 @end smallexample
5739 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5740
5741 @table @code
5742 @item discard
5743 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5744
5745 @item one_only
5746 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5747
5748 @item same_size
5749 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5750
5751 @item same_contents
5752 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5753 @end table
5754
5755 @node List
5756 @section @code{.list}
5757
5758 @cindex @code{list} directive
5759 @cindex listing control, turning on
5760 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5761 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5762 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5763 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5764 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5765
5766 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5767 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5768 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5769
5770 @node Ln
5771 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5772
5773 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5774 @ifclear no-line-dir
5775 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5776 @end ifclear
5777 @ifset no-line-dir
5778 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5779 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5780 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5781 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5782 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5783 @ifset BOUT
5784
5785 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5786 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5787 output format.
5788 @end ifset
5789 @end ifset
5790
5791 @node Loc
5792 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5793 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5794 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5795 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5796 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5797 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5798 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5799 the row is added.
5800
5801 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5802
5803 @table @code
5804 @item basic_block
5805 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5806 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5807
5808 @item prologue_end
5809 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5810 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5811
5812 @item epilogue_begin
5813 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5814 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5815
5816 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5817 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5818 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5819 either 0 or 1.
5820
5821 @item isa @var{value}
5822 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5823 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5824
5825 @item discriminator @var{value}
5826 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5827 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5828
5829 @end table
5830
5831 @node Loc_mark_labels
5832 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5833 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5834 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5835 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5836 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5837 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5838 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5839 this function respectively.
5840
5841 @ifset ELF
5842 @node Local
5843 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5844
5845 @cindex @code{local} directive
5846 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5847 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5848 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5849 they will be created.
5850
5851 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5852 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5853 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5854 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5855 @end ifset
5856
5857 @node Long
5858 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5859
5860 @cindex @code{long} directive
5861 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5862
5863 @ignore
5864 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5865 @c what it really ought to do
5866 @node Lsym
5867 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5868
5869 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5870 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5871 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5872 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5873 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5874 the same as the expression value:
5875 @smallexample
5876 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5877 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5878 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5879 @end smallexample
5880 @noindent
5881 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5882 @end ignore
5883
5884 @node Macro
5885 @section @code{.macro}
5886
5887 @cindex macros
5888 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5889 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5890 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5891
5892 @example
5893 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5894 .long \from
5895 .if \to-\from
5896 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5897 .endif
5898 .endm
5899 @end example
5900
5901 @noindent
5902 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5903
5904 @example
5905 .long 0
5906 .long 1
5907 .long 2
5908 .long 3
5909 .long 4
5910 .long 5
5911 @end example
5912
5913 @ftable @code
5914 @item .macro @var{macname}
5915 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5916 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5917 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5918 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5919 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5920 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5921 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5922 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5923 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5924 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5925 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5926 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5927
5928 @table @code
5929 @item .macro comm
5930 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5931 arguments.
5932
5933 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5934 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5935 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5936 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5937 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5938
5939 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5940 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5941 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5942 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5943 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5944 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5945 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5946 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5947
5948 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5949 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5950 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5951 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5952 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5953
5954 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5955 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5956 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5957
5958 @end table
5959
5960 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5961 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5962 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5963 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5964 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5965 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5966 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5967 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5968 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5969 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5970 this macro definition:
5971
5972 @example
5973 .macro label l
5974 \l:
5975 .endm
5976 @end example
5977
5978 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5979 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5980 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5981 identifier.
5982
5983 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5984 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5985 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5986 length specifier like this:
5987
5988 @example
5989 .macro opcode base length
5990 \base.\length
5991 .endm
5992 @end example
5993
5994 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5995 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5996 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5997
5998 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5999
6000 @table @code
6001 @item Insert white space
6002 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
6003 solution. eg:
6004
6005 @example
6006 .macro label l
6007 \l :
6008 .endm
6009 @end example
6010
6011 @item Use @samp{\()}
6012 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
6013 the following text. eg:
6014
6015 @example
6016 .macro opcode base length
6017 \base\().\length
6018 .endm
6019 @end example
6020
6021 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
6022 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
6023 used as a separator. eg:
6024
6025 @example
6026 .altmacro
6027 .macro label l
6028 l&:
6029 .endm
6030 @end example
6031 @end table
6032
6033 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
6034 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
6035 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
6036
6037 @item .endm
6038 @cindex @code{endm} directive
6039 Mark the end of a macro definition.
6040
6041 @item .exitm
6042 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
6043 Exit early from the current macro definition.
6044
6045 @cindex number of macros executed
6046 @cindex macros, count executed
6047 @item \@@
6048 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
6049 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
6050 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
6051
6052 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
6053 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
6054 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
6055 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
6056 @end ftable
6057
6058 @node MRI
6059 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
6060
6061 @cindex @code{mri} directive
6062 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
6063 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
6064 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
6065 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
6066 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
6067
6068 @node Noaltmacro
6069 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
6070 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6071
6072 @node Nolist
6073 @section @code{.nolist}
6074
6075 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6076 @cindex listing control, turning off
6077 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6078 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6079 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6080 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6081 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6082
6083 @node Octa
6084 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6085
6086 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
6087 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6088 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6089 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6090 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6091 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6092
6093 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6094 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6095
6096 @node Offset
6097 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6098
6099 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6100 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6101 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6102 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6103 directive.
6104
6105 @node Org
6106 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6107
6108 @cindex @code{org} directive
6109 @cindex location counter, advancing
6110 @cindex advancing location counter
6111 @cindex current address, advancing
6112 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6113 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6114 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6115 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6116 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6117 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6118 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6119 is the same as the current subsection.
6120
6121 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6122 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6123 backwards.
6124
6125 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6126 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6127 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6128 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6129 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6130 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6131
6132 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6133 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6134 people's assemblers.
6135
6136 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6137 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6138 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6139 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6140
6141 @node P2align
6142 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
6143
6144 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6145 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6146 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6147 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6148 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6149 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6150 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6151 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
6152
6153 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6154 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6155 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
6156 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6157 with no-op instructions.
6158
6159 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6160 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6161 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6162 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6163 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6164 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6165 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6166
6167 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6168 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6169 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6170 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6171 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6172 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6173 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6174 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6175 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6176 undefined.
6177
6178 @ifset ELF
6179 @node PopSection
6180 @section @code{.popsection}
6181
6182 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6183 @cindex Section Stack
6184 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6185 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6186 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6187 (@pxref{Previous}).
6188
6189 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6190 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6191 stack.
6192 @end ifset
6193
6194 @ifset ELF
6195 @node Previous
6196 @section @code{.previous}
6197
6198 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6199 @cindex Section Stack
6200 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6201 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6202 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6203 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6204
6205 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6206 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6207 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6208 subsections). For example:
6209
6210 @smallexample
6211 .section A
6212 .subsection 1
6213 .word 0x1234
6214 .subsection 2
6215 .word 0x5678
6216 .previous
6217 .word 0x9abc
6218 @end smallexample
6219
6220 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6221 section A. Whilst:
6222
6223 @smallexample
6224 .section A
6225 .subsection 1
6226 # Now in section A subsection 1
6227 .word 0x1234
6228 .section B
6229 .subsection 0
6230 # Now in section B subsection 0
6231 .word 0x5678
6232 .subsection 1
6233 # Now in section B subsection 1
6234 .word 0x9abc
6235 .previous
6236 # Now in section B subsection 0
6237 .word 0xdef0
6238 @end smallexample
6239
6240 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6241 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6242
6243 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6244 the top section on the section stack.
6245 @end ifset
6246
6247 @node Print
6248 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6249
6250 @cindex @code{print} directive
6251 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6252 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6253
6254 @ifset ELF
6255 @node Protected
6256 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6257
6258 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6259 @cindex visibility
6260 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6261 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6262
6263 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6264 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6265 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6266 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6267 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6268 this.
6269 @end ifset
6270
6271 @node Psize
6272 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6273
6274 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6275 @cindex listing control: paper size
6276 @cindex paper size, for listings
6277 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6278 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6279
6280 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6281 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6282 default width is 200 columns.
6283
6284 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6285 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6286 @code{.eject}).
6287
6288 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6289 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6290
6291 @node Purgem
6292 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6293
6294 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6295 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6296 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6297
6298 @ifset ELF
6299 @node PushSection
6300 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6301
6302 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6303 @cindex Section Stack
6304 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6305 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6306 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6307 (@pxref{Previous}).
6308
6309 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6310 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6311 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6312 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6313 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6314 @end ifset
6315
6316 @node Quad
6317 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6318
6319 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6320 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6321 each bignum, it emits
6322 @ifclear bignum-16
6323 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6324 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6325 @cindex eight-byte integer
6326 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6327
6328 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6329 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6330 @end ifclear
6331 @ifset bignum-16
6332 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6333 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6334 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6335 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6336 @end ifset
6337
6338 @node Reloc
6339 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6340
6341 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6342 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6343 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6344 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6345 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6346 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6347 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6348 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6349 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6350 section.
6351
6352 @node Rept
6353 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6354
6355 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6356 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6357 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6358
6359 For example, assembling
6360
6361 @example
6362 .rept 3
6363 .long 0
6364 .endr
6365 @end example
6366
6367 is equivalent to assembling
6368
6369 @example
6370 .long 0
6371 .long 0
6372 .long 0
6373 @end example
6374
6375 @node Sbttl
6376 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6377
6378 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6379 @cindex subtitles for listings
6380 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6381 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6382 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6383
6384 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6385 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6386
6387 @ifset COFF
6388 @node Scl
6389 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6390
6391 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6392 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6393 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6394 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6395 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6396 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6397 symbolic debugging information.
6398 @ifset BOUT
6399
6400 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6401 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6402 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6403 @end ifset
6404 @end ifset
6405
6406 @ifset COFF-ELF
6407 @node Section
6408 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6409
6410 @cindex named section
6411 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6412 named @var{name}.
6413
6414 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6415 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6416 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6417
6418 @ifset COFF
6419 @ifset ELF
6420 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6421 @subheading COFF Version
6422 @end ifset
6423
6424 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6425 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6426 ways:
6427
6428 @smallexample
6429 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6430 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6431 @end smallexample
6432
6433 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6434 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6435
6436 @table @code
6437 @item b
6438 bss section (uninitialized data)
6439 @item n
6440 section is not loaded
6441 @item w
6442 writable section
6443 @item d
6444 data section
6445 @item e
6446 exclude section from linking
6447 @item r
6448 read-only section
6449 @item x
6450 executable section
6451 @item s
6452 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6453 @item a
6454 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6455 @item y
6456 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6457 @item 0-9
6458 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6459 @end table
6460
6461 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6462 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6463 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6464 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6465 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6466
6467 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6468 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6469 @end ifset
6470
6471 @ifset ELF
6472 @ifset COFF
6473 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6474 @subheading ELF Version
6475 @end ifset
6476
6477 @cindex Section Stack
6478 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6479 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6480 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6481 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6482
6483 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6484 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6485
6486 @smallexample
6487 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6488 @end smallexample
6489
6490 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6491 @kindex --sectname-subst
6492 @cindex section name substitution
6493 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6494 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6495 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6496
6497 @smallexample
6498 .macro exception_code
6499 .section %S.exception
6500 [exception code here]
6501 .previous
6502 .endm
6503
6504 .text
6505 [code]
6506 exception_code
6507 [...]
6508
6509 .section .init
6510 [init code]
6511 exception_code
6512 [...]
6513 @end smallexample
6514
6515 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6516 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6517 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between ancillary sections that are
6518 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from ancillary sections that
6519 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6520 macros just for that purpose.
6521
6522 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6523 combination of the following characters:
6524
6525 @table @code
6526 @item a
6527 section is allocatable
6528 @item e
6529 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6530 @item w
6531 section is writable
6532 @item x
6533 section is executable
6534 @item M
6535 section is mergeable
6536 @item S
6537 section contains zero terminated strings
6538 @item G
6539 section is a member of a section group
6540 @item T
6541 section is used for thread-local-storage
6542 @item ?
6543 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6544 @item @code{<number>}
6545 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6546 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6547 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6548 resulting value.
6549 @item @code{<target specific>}
6550 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6551 @end table
6552
6553 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6554 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6555 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6556 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6557 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6558 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6559
6560 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6561
6562 @table @code
6563 @item @@progbits
6564 section contains data
6565 @item @@nobits
6566 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6567 @item @@note
6568 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6569 @item @@init_array
6570 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6571 @item @@fini_array
6572 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6573 @item @@preinit_array
6574 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6575 @item @@@code{<number>}
6576 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6577 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6578 some targets extend this list with their own types
6579 @end table
6580
6581 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6582 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6583
6584 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6585 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6586 @code{%} character.
6587
6588 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6589 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6590 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6591
6592 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6593 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6594
6595 @smallexample
6596 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6597 @end smallexample
6598
6599 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6600 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6601 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6602 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6603 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6604 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6605 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6606 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6607 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6608
6609 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6610 be present along with an additional field like this:
6611
6612 @smallexample
6613 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6614 @end smallexample
6615
6616 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6617 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6618
6619 @table @code
6620 @item comdat
6621 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6622 @item .gnu.linkonce
6623 an alias for comdat
6624 @end table
6625
6626 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6627 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6628
6629 @smallexample
6630 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6631 @end smallexample
6632
6633 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6634 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6635 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6636 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6637 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6638 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6639
6640 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6641 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6642 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6643 executable. The section will contain data.
6644
6645 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6646 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6647
6648 @smallexample
6649 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6650 @end smallexample
6651
6652 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6653 separated flags:
6654
6655 @table @code
6656 @item #alloc
6657 section is allocatable
6658 @item #write
6659 section is writable
6660 @item #execinstr
6661 section is executable
6662 @item #exclude
6663 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6664 @item #tls
6665 section is used for thread local storage
6666 @end table
6667
6668 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6669 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6670 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6671 work.
6672 @end ifset
6673 @end ifset
6674
6675 @node Set
6676 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6677
6678 @cindex @code{set} directive
6679 @cindex symbol value, setting
6680 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6681 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6682 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6683 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6684
6685 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6686 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6687 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6688 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6689 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6690 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6691 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6692 different symbols.
6693
6694 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6695 file is the last value stored into it.
6696
6697 @ifset Z80
6698 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6699 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6700 @end ifset
6701
6702 @node Short
6703 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6704
6705 @cindex @code{short} directive
6706 @ifset GENERIC
6707 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6708 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6709
6710 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6711 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6712 @end ifset
6713 @ifclear GENERIC
6714 @ifset W16
6715 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6716 @end ifset
6717 @ifset W32
6718 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6719 a 16 bit number for each.
6720 @end ifset
6721 @end ifclear
6722
6723 @node Single
6724 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6725
6726 @cindex @code{single} directive
6727 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6728 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6729 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6730 @ifset GENERIC
6731 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6732 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6733 @end ifset
6734 @ifclear GENERIC
6735 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6736 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6737 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6738 @end ifset
6739 @end ifclear
6740
6741 @ifset COFF-ELF
6742 @node Size
6743 @section @code{.size}
6744
6745 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6746
6747 @ifset COFF
6748 @ifset ELF
6749 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6750 @subheading COFF Version
6751 @end ifset
6752
6753 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6754 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6755 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6756
6757 @smallexample
6758 .size @var{expression}
6759 @end smallexample
6760
6761 @ifset BOUT
6762 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6763 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6764 ignores it.
6765 @end ifset
6766 @end ifset
6767
6768 @ifset ELF
6769 @ifset COFF
6770 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6771 @subheading ELF Version
6772 @end ifset
6773
6774 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6775 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6776
6777 @smallexample
6778 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6779 @end smallexample
6780
6781 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6782 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6783 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6784 symbols.
6785 @end ifset
6786 @end ifset
6787
6788 @ifclear no-space-dir
6789 @node Skip
6790 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6791
6792 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6793 @cindex filling memory
6794 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6795 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6796 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6797 @samp{.space}.
6798 @end ifclear
6799
6800 @node Sleb128
6801 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6802
6803 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6804 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6805 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6806 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6807
6808 @ifclear no-space-dir
6809 @node Space
6810 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6811
6812 @cindex @code{space} directive
6813 @cindex filling memory
6814 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6815 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6816 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6817 as @samp{.skip}.
6818
6819 @ifset HPPA
6820 @quotation
6821 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6822 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6823 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6824 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6825 for a summary.
6826 @end quotation
6827 @end ifset
6828 @end ifclear
6829
6830 @ifset have-stabs
6831 @node Stab
6832 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6833
6834 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6835 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6836 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6837 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6838 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6839 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6840 Up to five fields are required:
6841
6842 @table @var
6843 @item string
6844 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6845 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6846 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6847 using this field.
6848
6849 @item type
6850 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6851 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6852 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6853
6854 @item other
6855 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6856 low 8 bits of this expression.
6857
6858 @item desc
6859 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6860 bits of this expression.
6861
6862 @item value
6863 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6864 @end table
6865
6866 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6867 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6868 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6869 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6870
6871 @table @code
6872 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6873 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6874
6875 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6876 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6877 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6878 strings.
6879
6880 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6881 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6882 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6883 assembled.
6884
6885 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6886 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6887 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6888
6889 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6890 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6891 All five fields are specified.
6892 @end table
6893 @end ifset
6894 @c end have-stabs
6895
6896 @node String
6897 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6898 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6899
6900 @cindex string, copying to object file
6901 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6902 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6903 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6904 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6905 @cindex @code{string} directive
6906 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6907 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6908 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6909 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6910
6911 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6912 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6913 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6914 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6915
6916 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6917 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6918 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6919 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6920
6921 Example:
6922 @smallexample
6923 .string32 "BYE"
6924 expands to:
6925 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6926 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6927 @end smallexample
6928
6929
6930 @node Struct
6931 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6932
6933 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6934 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6935 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6936 @smallexample
6937 .struct 0
6938 field1:
6939 .struct field1 + 4
6940 field2:
6941 .struct field2 + 4
6942 field3:
6943 @end smallexample
6944 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6945 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6946 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6947 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6948 before further assembly.
6949
6950 @ifset ELF
6951 @node SubSection
6952 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6953
6954 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6955 @cindex Section Stack
6956 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6957 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6958 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6959 (@pxref{Previous}).
6960
6961 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6962 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6963 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6964 @end ifset
6965
6966 @ifset ELF
6967 @node Symver
6968 @section @code{.symver}
6969 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6970 @cindex symbol versioning
6971 @cindex versions of symbols
6972 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6973 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6974 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6975 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6976 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6977 shared library.
6978
6979 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6980 @smallexample
6981 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6982 @end smallexample
6983 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6984 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6985 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6986 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6987 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6988 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6989 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6990 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6991 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6992 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6993 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6994 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6995 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6996 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6997
6998 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6999 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
7000 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
7001 symbol table.
7002
7003 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7004 @smallexample
7005 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
7006 @end smallexample
7007 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
7008 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
7009 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
7010 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
7011
7012 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7013 @smallexample
7014 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
7015 @end smallexample
7016 When @var{name} is not defined within the
7017 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
7018 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
7019 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
7020 @end ifset
7021
7022 @ifset COFF
7023 @node Tag
7024 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
7025
7026 @cindex COFF structure debugging
7027 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
7028 @cindex @code{tag} directive
7029 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
7030 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
7031 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
7032 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
7033 @ifset BOUT
7034
7035 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
7036 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
7037 ignores it.
7038 @end ifset
7039 @end ifset
7040
7041 @node Text
7042 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
7043
7044 @cindex @code{text} directive
7045 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
7046 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
7047 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
7048 is used.
7049
7050 @node Title
7051 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
7052
7053 @cindex @code{title} directive
7054 @cindex listing control: title line
7055 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
7056 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
7057
7058 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
7059 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
7060
7061 @ifset COFF-ELF
7062 @node Type
7063 @section @code{.type}
7064
7065 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7066
7067 @ifset COFF
7068 @ifset ELF
7069 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7070 @subheading COFF Version
7071 @end ifset
7072
7073 @cindex COFF symbol type
7074 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7075 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7076 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7077 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7078
7079 @smallexample
7080 .type @var{int}
7081 @end smallexample
7082
7083 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7084 entry.
7085
7086 @ifset BOUT
7087 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
7088 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
7089 directive but ignores it.
7090 @end ifset
7091 @end ifset
7092
7093 @ifset ELF
7094 @ifset COFF
7095 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7096 @subheading ELF Version
7097 @end ifset
7098
7099 @cindex ELF symbol type
7100 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7101 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7102 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7103
7104 @smallexample
7105 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7106 @end smallexample
7107
7108 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7109 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7110 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7111 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7112
7113 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7114 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7115 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7116 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7117 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7118 assemblers.
7119
7120 The syntaxes supported are:
7121
7122 @smallexample
7123 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7124 .type <name>,#<type>
7125 .type <name>,@@<type>
7126 .type <name>,%<type>
7127 .type <name>,"<type>"
7128 @end smallexample
7129
7130 The types supported are:
7131
7132 @table @gcctabopt
7133 @item STT_FUNC
7134 @itemx function
7135 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7136
7137 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7138 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7139 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7140 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7141
7142 @item STT_OBJECT
7143 @itemx object
7144 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7145
7146 @item STT_TLS
7147 @itemx tls_object
7148 Mark the symbol as being a thread-local data object.
7149
7150 @item STT_COMMON
7151 @itemx common
7152 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7153
7154 @item STT_NOTYPE
7155 @itemx notype
7156 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7157
7158 @item gnu_unique_object
7159 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7160 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7161 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7162 systems).
7163
7164 @end table
7165
7166 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7167
7168 @end ifset
7169 @end ifset
7170
7171 @node Uleb128
7172 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7173
7174 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7175 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7176 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7177 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7178
7179 @ifset COFF
7180 @node Val
7181 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7182
7183 @cindex @code{val} directive
7184 @cindex COFF value attribute
7185 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7186 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7187 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7188 entry.
7189 @ifset BOUT
7190
7191 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
7192 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
7193 @end ifset
7194 @end ifset
7195
7196 @ifset ELF
7197 @node Version
7198 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7199
7200 @cindex @code{version} directive
7201 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7202 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7203 @end ifset
7204
7205 @ifset ELF
7206 @node VTableEntry
7207 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7208
7209 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7210 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7211 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7212
7213 @node VTableInherit
7214 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7215
7216 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7217 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7218 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7219 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7220 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7221 @end ifset
7222
7223 @node Warning
7224 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7225 @cindex warning directive
7226 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7227 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7228
7229 @node Weak
7230 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7231
7232 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7233 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7234 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7235
7236 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7237 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7238 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7239
7240 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7241 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7242 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7243
7244 @node Weakref
7245 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7246
7247 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7248 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7249 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7250 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7251 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7252 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7253
7254 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7255 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7256 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7257 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7258 had the references to the alias removed.
7259
7260 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7261 within the assembler.
7262
7263 @node Word
7264 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7265
7266 @cindex @code{word} directive
7267 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7268 separated by commas.
7269 @ifclear GENERIC
7270 @ifset W32
7271 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7272 @end ifset
7273 @ifset W16
7274 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7275 @end ifset
7276 @end ifclear
7277 @ifset GENERIC
7278
7279 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7280 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7281 @end ifset
7282
7283 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7284 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7285 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7286 @cindex difference tables altered
7287 @cindex altered difference tables
7288 @quotation
7289 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7290 @end quotation
7291
7292 @ifset GENERIC
7293 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7294 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7295 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7296 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7297
7298 @end ifset
7299 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7300 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7301 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7302 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7303 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7304 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7305 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7306 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7307 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7308 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7309 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7310 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7311 @code{sym2}.
7312
7313 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7314 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7315 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7316 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7317 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7318 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7319 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7320
7321 @ifset INTERNALS
7322 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7323 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7324 assembly language programmers.
7325 @end ifset
7326 @end ifset
7327 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7328
7329 @ifclear no-space-dir
7330 @node Zero
7331 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7332
7333 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7334 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7335 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7336 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7337 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7338 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7339 @end ifclear
7340
7341 @ifset ELF
7342 @node 2byte
7343 @section @code{.2byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7344 @cindex @code{2byte} directive
7345 @cindex two-byte integer
7346 @cindex integer, 2-byte
7347
7348 This directive expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. If there
7349 are no expressions then the directive does nothing. Otherwise each expression
7350 is evaluated in turn and placed in the next two bytes of the current output
7351 section, using the endian model of the target. If an expression will not fit
7352 in two bytes, a warning message is displayed and the least significant two
7353 bytes of the expression's value are used. If an expression cannot be evaluated
7354 at assembly time then relocations will be generated in order to compute the
7355 value at link time.
7356
7357 This directive does not apply any alignment before or after inserting the
7358 values. As a result of this, if relocations are generated, they may be
7359 different from those used for inserting values with a guaranteed alignment.
7360
7361 This directive is only available for ELF targets,
7362
7363 @node 4byte
7364 @section @code{.4byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7365 @cindex @code{4byte} directive
7366 @cindex four-byte integer
7367 @cindex integer, 4-byte
7368
7369 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, four byte
7370 long values into the output.
7371
7372 @node 8byte
7373 @section @code{.8byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7374 @cindex @code{8byte} directive
7375 @cindex eight-byte integer
7376 @cindex integer, 8-byte
7377
7378 Like the @option{.8byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, eight
7379 byte long bignum values into the output.
7380
7381 @end ifset
7382
7383 @node Deprecated
7384 @section Deprecated Directives
7385
7386 @cindex deprecated directives
7387 @cindex obsolescent directives
7388 One day these directives won't work.
7389 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7390 @table @t
7391 @item .abort
7392 @item .line
7393 @end table
7394
7395 @ifset ELF
7396 @node Object Attributes
7397 @chapter Object Attributes
7398 @cindex object attributes
7399
7400 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7401 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7402 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7403 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7404 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7405 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7406 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7407 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7408 newer generation at run-time.
7409
7410 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7411 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7412 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7413 correctly.
7414
7415 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7416 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7417 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7418 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7419 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7420 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7421
7422 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7423 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7424
7425 @menu
7426 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7427 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7428 @end menu
7429
7430 @node GNU Object Attributes
7431 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7432
7433 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7434 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7435
7436 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7437 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7438 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7439 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7440 architecture-dependent ones.
7441
7442 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7443
7444 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7445
7446 @table @r
7447 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7448 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7449 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7450 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7451 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7452 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7453 @end table
7454
7455 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7456
7457 @table @r
7458 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7459 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7460
7461 @itemize @bullet
7462 @item
7463 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7464 @item
7465 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7466 double-precision FPU.
7467 @item
7468 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7469 @item
7470 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7471 @item
7472 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7473 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7474 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7475 @item
7476 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7477 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7478 general-purpose registers.
7479 @item
7480 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7481 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7482 @item
7483 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7484 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7485 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7486 @end itemize
7487 @end table
7488
7489 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7490
7491 @table @r
7492 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7493 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7494
7495 @itemize @bullet
7496 @item
7497 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7498 @item
7499 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7500 @item
7501 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7502 @item
7503 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7504 @end itemize
7505
7506 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7507 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7508
7509 @itemize @bullet
7510 @item
7511 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7512 @item
7513 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7514 @item
7515 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7516 @item
7517 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7518 @end itemize
7519 @end table
7520
7521 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7522
7523 @table @r
7524 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7525 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7526
7527 @itemize @bullet
7528 @item
7529 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7530 @item
7531 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7532 @item
7533 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7534 @end itemize
7535 @end table
7536
7537 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7538 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7539
7540 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7541 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7542 mailing list.
7543
7544 @itemize @bullet
7545 @item
7546 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7547 @item
7548 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7549 @item
7550 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7551 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7552 @item
7553 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7554 @item
7555 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7556 @item
7557 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7558 @end itemize
7559
7560 @end ifset
7561
7562 @ifset GENERIC
7563 @node Machine Dependencies
7564 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7565
7566 @cindex machine dependencies
7567 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7568 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7569 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7570 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7571 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7572 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7573 optimization.
7574
7575 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7576 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7577 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7578
7579 @menu
7580 @ifset AARCH64
7581 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7582 @end ifset
7583 @ifset ALPHA
7584 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7585 @end ifset
7586 @ifset ARC
7587 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7588 @end ifset
7589 @ifset ARM
7590 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7591 @end ifset
7592 @ifset AVR
7593 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7594 @end ifset
7595 @ifset Blackfin
7596 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7597 @end ifset
7598 @ifset CR16
7599 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7600 @end ifset
7601 @ifset CRIS
7602 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7603 @end ifset
7604 @ifset D10V
7605 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7606 @end ifset
7607 @ifset D30V
7608 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7609 @end ifset
7610 @ifset EPIPHANY
7611 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7612 @end ifset
7613 @ifset H8/300
7614 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7615 @end ifset
7616 @ifset HPPA
7617 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7618 @end ifset
7619 @ifset I370
7620 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7621 @end ifset
7622 @ifset I80386
7623 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7624 @end ifset
7625 @ifset I860
7626 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7627 @end ifset
7628 @ifset I960
7629 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7630 @end ifset
7631 @ifset IA64
7632 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7633 @end ifset
7634 @ifset IP2K
7635 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7636 @end ifset
7637 @ifset LM32
7638 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7639 @end ifset
7640 @ifset M32C
7641 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7642 @end ifset
7643 @ifset M32R
7644 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7645 @end ifset
7646 @ifset M680X0
7647 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7648 @end ifset
7649 @ifset M68HC11
7650 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7651 @end ifset
7652 @ifset METAG
7653 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7654 @end ifset
7655 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7656 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7657 @end ifset
7658 @ifset MIPS
7659 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7660 @end ifset
7661 @ifset MMIX
7662 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7663 @end ifset
7664 @ifset MSP430
7665 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7666 @end ifset
7667 @ifset NDS32
7668 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7669 @end ifset
7670 @ifset NIOSII
7671 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7672 @end ifset
7673 @ifset NS32K
7674 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7675 @end ifset
7676 @ifset PDP11
7677 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7678 @end ifset
7679 @ifset PJ
7680 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7681 @end ifset
7682 @ifset PPC
7683 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7684 @end ifset
7685 @ifset PRU
7686 * PRU-Dependent:: PRU Dependent Features
7687 @end ifset
7688 @ifset RL78
7689 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7690 @end ifset
7691 @ifset RISCV
7692 * RISC-V-Dependent:: RISC-V Dependent Features
7693 @end ifset
7694 @ifset RX
7695 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7696 @end ifset
7697 @ifset S390
7698 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7699 @end ifset
7700 @ifset SCORE
7701 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7702 @end ifset
7703 @ifset SH
7704 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7705 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7706 @end ifset
7707 @ifset SPARC
7708 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7709 @end ifset
7710 @ifset TIC54X
7711 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7712 @end ifset
7713 @ifset TIC6X
7714 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7715 @end ifset
7716 @ifset TILEGX
7717 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7718 @end ifset
7719 @ifset TILEPRO
7720 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7721 @end ifset
7722 @ifset V850
7723 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7724 @end ifset
7725 @ifset VAX
7726 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7727 @end ifset
7728 @ifset VISIUM
7729 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7730 @end ifset
7731 @ifset WASM32
7732 * WebAssembly-Dependent:: WebAssembly Dependent Features
7733 @end ifset
7734 @ifset XGATE
7735 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Dependent Features
7736 @end ifset
7737 @ifset XSTORMY16
7738 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7739 @end ifset
7740 @ifset XTENSA
7741 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7742 @end ifset
7743 @ifset Z80
7744 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7745 @end ifset
7746 @ifset Z8000
7747 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7748 @end ifset
7749 @end menu
7750
7751 @lowersections
7752 @end ifset
7753
7754 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7755 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7756 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7757 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7758 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7759 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7760 @c in both conditional blocks.
7761
7762 @ifset AARCH64
7763 @include c-aarch64.texi
7764 @end ifset
7765
7766 @ifset ALPHA
7767 @include c-alpha.texi
7768 @end ifset
7769
7770 @ifset ARC
7771 @include c-arc.texi
7772 @end ifset
7773
7774 @ifset ARM
7775 @include c-arm.texi
7776 @end ifset
7777
7778 @ifset AVR
7779 @include c-avr.texi
7780 @end ifset
7781
7782 @ifset Blackfin
7783 @include c-bfin.texi
7784 @end ifset
7785
7786 @ifset CR16
7787 @include c-cr16.texi
7788 @end ifset
7789
7790 @ifset CRIS
7791 @include c-cris.texi
7792 @end ifset
7793
7794 @ifset Renesas-all
7795 @ifclear GENERIC
7796 @node Machine Dependencies
7797 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7798
7799 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7800 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7801 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7802 family.
7803
7804 @menu
7805 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7806 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7807 @end menu
7808 @lowersections
7809 @end ifclear
7810 @end ifset
7811
7812 @ifset D10V
7813 @include c-d10v.texi
7814 @end ifset
7815
7816 @ifset D30V
7817 @include c-d30v.texi
7818 @end ifset
7819
7820 @ifset EPIPHANY
7821 @include c-epiphany.texi
7822 @end ifset
7823
7824 @ifset H8/300
7825 @include c-h8300.texi
7826 @end ifset
7827
7828 @ifset HPPA
7829 @include c-hppa.texi
7830 @end ifset
7831
7832 @ifset I370
7833 @include c-i370.texi
7834 @end ifset
7835
7836 @ifset I80386
7837 @include c-i386.texi
7838 @end ifset
7839
7840 @ifset I860
7841 @include c-i860.texi
7842 @end ifset
7843
7844 @ifset I960
7845 @include c-i960.texi
7846 @end ifset
7847
7848 @ifset IA64
7849 @include c-ia64.texi
7850 @end ifset
7851
7852 @ifset IP2K
7853 @include c-ip2k.texi
7854 @end ifset
7855
7856 @ifset LM32
7857 @include c-lm32.texi
7858 @end ifset
7859
7860 @ifset M32C
7861 @include c-m32c.texi
7862 @end ifset
7863
7864 @ifset M32R
7865 @include c-m32r.texi
7866 @end ifset
7867
7868 @ifset M680X0
7869 @include c-m68k.texi
7870 @end ifset
7871
7872 @ifset M68HC11
7873 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7874 @end ifset
7875
7876 @ifset METAG
7877 @include c-metag.texi
7878 @end ifset
7879
7880 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7881 @include c-microblaze.texi
7882 @end ifset
7883
7884 @ifset MIPS
7885 @include c-mips.texi
7886 @end ifset
7887
7888 @ifset MMIX
7889 @include c-mmix.texi
7890 @end ifset
7891
7892 @ifset MSP430
7893 @include c-msp430.texi
7894 @end ifset
7895
7896 @ifset NDS32
7897 @include c-nds32.texi
7898 @end ifset
7899
7900 @ifset NIOSII
7901 @include c-nios2.texi
7902 @end ifset
7903
7904 @ifset NS32K
7905 @include c-ns32k.texi
7906 @end ifset
7907
7908 @ifset PDP11
7909 @include c-pdp11.texi
7910 @end ifset
7911
7912 @ifset PJ
7913 @include c-pj.texi
7914 @end ifset
7915
7916 @ifset PPC
7917 @include c-ppc.texi
7918 @end ifset
7919
7920 @ifset PRU
7921 @include c-pru.texi
7922 @end ifset
7923
7924 @ifset RL78
7925 @include c-rl78.texi
7926 @end ifset
7927
7928 @ifset RISCV
7929 @include c-riscv.texi
7930 @end ifset
7931
7932 @ifset RX
7933 @include c-rx.texi
7934 @end ifset
7935
7936 @ifset S390
7937 @include c-s390.texi
7938 @end ifset
7939
7940 @ifset SCORE
7941 @include c-score.texi
7942 @end ifset
7943
7944 @ifset SH
7945 @include c-sh.texi
7946 @include c-sh64.texi
7947 @end ifset
7948
7949 @ifset SPARC
7950 @include c-sparc.texi
7951 @end ifset
7952
7953 @ifset TIC54X
7954 @include c-tic54x.texi
7955 @end ifset
7956
7957 @ifset TIC6X
7958 @include c-tic6x.texi
7959 @end ifset
7960
7961 @ifset TILEGX
7962 @include c-tilegx.texi
7963 @end ifset
7964
7965 @ifset TILEPRO
7966 @include c-tilepro.texi
7967 @end ifset
7968
7969 @ifset V850
7970 @include c-v850.texi
7971 @end ifset
7972
7973 @ifset VAX
7974 @include c-vax.texi
7975 @end ifset
7976
7977 @ifset VISIUM
7978 @include c-visium.texi
7979 @end ifset
7980
7981 @ifset WASM32
7982 @include c-wasm32.texi
7983 @end ifset
7984
7985 @ifset XGATE
7986 @include c-xgate.texi
7987 @end ifset
7988
7989 @ifset XSTORMY16
7990 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7991 @end ifset
7992
7993 @ifset XTENSA
7994 @include c-xtensa.texi
7995 @end ifset
7996
7997 @ifset Z80
7998 @include c-z80.texi
7999 @end ifset
8000
8001 @ifset Z8000
8002 @include c-z8k.texi
8003 @end ifset
8004
8005 @ifset GENERIC
8006 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
8007 @raisesections
8008 @end ifset
8009
8010 @node Reporting Bugs
8011 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8012 @cindex bugs in assembler
8013 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
8014
8015 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
8016
8017 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
8018 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
8019 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
8020 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
8021
8022 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8023 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8024
8025 @menu
8026 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8027 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8028 @end menu
8029
8030 @node Bug Criteria
8031 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8032 @cindex bug criteria
8033
8034 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8035
8036 @itemize @bullet
8037 @cindex fatal signal
8038 @cindex assembler crash
8039 @cindex crash of assembler
8040 @item
8041 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8042 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
8043
8044 @cindex error on valid input
8045 @item
8046 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8047
8048 @cindex invalid input
8049 @item
8050 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8051 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
8052 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
8053
8054 @item
8055 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
8056 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
8057 @end itemize
8058
8059 @node Bug Reporting
8060 @section How to Report Bugs
8061 @cindex bug reports
8062 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
8063
8064 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
8065 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
8066 contact that organization first.
8067
8068 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8069 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8070 distribution.
8071
8072 @ifset BUGURL
8073 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
8074 to @value{BUGURL}.
8075 @end ifset
8076
8077 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8078 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8079 fact or leave it out, state it!
8080
8081 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
8082 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
8083 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
8084 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
8085 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
8086 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
8087 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
8088 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8089 and the most helpful.
8090
8091 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
8092 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
8093 that the bug has not been reported previously.
8094
8095 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8096 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8097 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8098 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8099
8100 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8101
8102 @itemize @bullet
8103 @item
8104 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8105 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8106
8107 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8108 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8109
8110 @item
8111 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8112
8113 @item
8114 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8115 version number.
8116
8117 @item
8118 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8119 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8120
8121 @item
8122 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8123 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8124 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8125
8126 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8127 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8128
8129 @item
8130 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
8131 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8132 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8133 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8134 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8135 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8136 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8137
8138 @item
8139 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8140 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8141
8142 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8143 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8144 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8145 make a mistake.
8146
8147 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8148 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8149 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8150 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8151 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8152 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8153 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8154 observations.
8155
8156 @item
8157 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8158 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8159 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8160 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8161 by line number.
8162
8163 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8164 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8165 @end itemize
8166
8167 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8168
8169 @itemize @bullet
8170 @item
8171 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8172
8173 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8174 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8175 changes will not affect it.
8176
8177 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8178 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8179 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8180 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8181
8182 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8183 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8184 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8185 less time, and so on.
8186
8187 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8188 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8189
8190 @item
8191 A patch for the bug.
8192
8193 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8194 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8195 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8196 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8197
8198 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8199 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8200 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8201 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8202
8203 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8204 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8205 help us to understand.
8206
8207 @item
8208 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8209
8210 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8211 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8212 @end itemize
8213
8214 @node Acknowledgements
8215 @chapter Acknowledgements
8216
8217 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8218 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8219 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8220 @c (October 2012),
8221 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8222
8223 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8224 more details?}
8225
8226 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8227 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8228 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8229
8230 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8231 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8232 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8233 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8234 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8235 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8236 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8237 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8238 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8239 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8240
8241 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8242 in format-specific I/O modules.
8243
8244 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8245 has done much work with it since.
8246
8247 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8248
8249 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8250
8251 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8252 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8253
8254 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8255 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8256 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8257 support a.out format.
8258
8259 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8260 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8261 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8262 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8263 targets.
8264
8265 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8266 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8267 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8268 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8269 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8270 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8271 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8272
8273 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8274 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8275 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8276 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8277
8278 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8279
8280 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8281
8282 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8283 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8284 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8285 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8286
8287 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8288 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8289 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8290 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8291 and some initial 64-bit support).
8292
8293 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8294
8295 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8296 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8297
8298 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8299 flavors.
8300
8301 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8302 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8303
8304 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8305 configuration enhancements.
8306
8307 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8308
8309 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8310 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8311 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8312 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8313
8314 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8315 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8316 @include fdl.texi
8317
8318 @node AS Index
8319 @unnumbered AS Index
8320
8321 @printindex cp
8322
8323 @bye
8324 @c Local Variables:
8325 @c fill-column: 79
8326 @c End:
This page took 0.189858 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.